PowerPoint Lectures Physics Giambattista PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 1213

Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 1: Introduction

•Why Study Physics?


•Mathematics and Physics Speak
•Scientific Notation and Significant Figures
•Units
•Dimensional Analysis
•Problem Solving Techniques
•Approximations
•Graphs

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.1 Why Study Physics?

Physics is the foundation of every science (astronomy,


biology, chemistry…).

Many pieces of technology and/or medical equipment and


procedures are developed with the help of physicists.

Studying physics will help you develop good thinking skills,


problem solving skills, and give you the background needed
to differentiate between science and pseudoscience.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Gain an appreciation for the simplicity of nature.

Physics encompasses all natural phenomena.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.2 Physics Speak

Be aware that physicists have their own precise definitions


of some words that are different from their common English
language definitions.

Examples: speed and velocity are no longer synonyms;


acceleration is a change of speed or direction.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.3 Math
Galileo Wrote:

Philosophy is written in this grand book, the universe, which stands


continually open to our gaze. But the book cannot be understood unless
one first learns to comprehend the language and read the characters in
which it is written. It is written in the language of mathematics, and its
characters are triangles, circles, and other geometric figures without
which it is humanly impossible to understand a single word of it; without
these, one is wandering in a dark labyrinth.

From Opere Il Saggiatore p. 171 by Galileo Galilei (http://www-gap.dcs.st-


and.ac.uk/~history/Mathematicians/Galileo.html)

Basically, the language spoken by physicists is mathematics.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Definitions:

y  mx  b
x is multiplied by the factor m.
The terms mx and b are added together.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example:

x
y  c
a

x is multiplied by the factor 1/a or x is divided by the factor


a. The terms x/a and c are added together.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Percentages:

Example: You put $10,000 in a CD for one year. The APY


is 3.05%. How much interest does the bank pay you at the
end of the year?

$10,000 1.0305  $10,305

The bank pays you


$305 in interest.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: You have $5,000 invested in stock XYZ. It loses


6.4% of its value today. How much is your investment now
worth?

$5,000  0.936  $4,680

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

 n 
The general rule is to multiply by 1  
 100 

where the (+) is used if the quantity is increasing and (–) is


used if the quantity is decreasing.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Proportions:

A is proportional to B. The value of A is


A B directly dependent on the value of B.

1 A is proportional to 1/B. The value of A is


A inversely dependent on the value of B.
B

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: For items at the grocery store:

cost  weight
The more you buy, the more you pay. This is just the
relationship between cost and weight.

To change from  to = we need to know the proportionality


constant.

cost  (cost per pound)  (weight)


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

2
Example: The area of a circle is A  r .

2
The area is proportional to the radius squared. Ar
The proportionality constant is .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.4 Scientific Notation &


Significant Figures

This is a shorthand way of writing very large and/or very


small numbers.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: The radius of the sun is 700,000 km.

Write as 7.0105 km.

When properly written this number


will be between 1.0 and 10.0

Example: The radius of a hydrogen atom is 0.0000000000529


m. This is more easily written as 5.2910-11 m.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Significant figures:

From the “purple box” on page 5:


1. Nonzero digits are always significant.
2. Final ending zeroes written to the right of the
decimal are significant. (Example: 7.00.)
3. Zeroes that are placeholders are not significant.
(Example: 700,000 versus 700,000.0.)
4. Zeroes written between digits are significant.
(Example: 105,000; 150,000.)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Please see text example 1.2 for more information on


significant figures.

Note: be sure not to round off any of your results until you
are reporting your final answer.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.5 Units
Some of the standard SI unit prefixes and their respective
powers of 10.

Prefix Power of 10 Prefix Power of 10


tera (T) 1012 centi (c) 10-2
giga (G) 109 milli (m) 10-3
mega (M) 106 micro () 10-6
kilo (k) 103 nano (n) 10-9
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Dimensions are basic types of quantities that can be


measured or computed. Examples are length, time, mass,
electric current, and temperature.

A unit is a standard amount of a dimensional quantity.


There is a need for a system of units. SI units will be
used throughout this class.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The quantities in this


column are based on an
agreed upon standard.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A derived unit is composed of combinations of base units.

Example: The SI unit of energy is the joule.

1 joule = 1 kg m2/sec2

Derived unit Base units


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Units can be freely converted from one to another.


Examples:

12 inches = 1 foot
1 inch = 2.54 cm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: The density of air is 1.3 kg/m3. Change the units


to slugs/ft3.

1 slug = 14.59 kg
1 m = 3.28 feet

3
kg  1 slug  1 m  3 3
1.3 3     2. 5  10 slugs/ft
m  14.59 kg  3.28 feet 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.6 Dimensional Analysis

Dimensions are basic types of quantities such as length [L];


time [T]; or mass [M].

The square brackets are


referring to dimensions not
units.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 1.74): Use dimensional analysis to


determine how the period of a pendulum depends on mass,
the length of the pendulum, and the acceleration due to
gravity (here the units are distance/time2).

Mass of the pendulum [M]


Length of the pendulum [L]
Acceleration of gravity [L/T2]

The period of a pendulum is how long it takes to complete 1


swing; the dimensions are time [T].

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

[Period] = [T] =

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.7 Problem Solving Techniques

Summary of the list on page 12:

•Read the problem thoroughly.


•Draw a picture.
•Label the picture with the given information.
•What is unknown?
•What physical principles apply?
•Are their multiple steps needed?
•Work symbolically! It is easier to catch mistakes.
•Calculate the end result. Don’t forget units!
•Check your answer for reasonableness.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.8 Approximations

All of the problems that we will do this semester will be an


approximation of reality. We will use models of how things
work to compute our desired results. The more effects we
include, the more correct our results will be.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 1.34): Estimate the number of


times a human heart beats during its lifetime.

Estimate that a typical heart beats ~60 times per minute:

 60 beats  60 minutes  24 hours  365 days  75 years 


     
 1 minute  1 hour  1day  1 year  1 lifetime 

 2.4  109 beats/lifetime

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§1.9 Graphs
Experimenters vary a quantity (the independent variable) and
measure another quantity (the dependent variable).

Dependent
variable here

Independent variable here


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Be sure to label the axes with both the quantity and its unit.
For example:

Position
(meters)

Time (seconds)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 1.39): A nurse recorded the values


shown in the table for a patient’s temperature. Plot a graph
of temperature versus time and find (a) the patient’s
temperature at noon, (b) the slope of the graph, and (c) if
you would expect the graph to follow the same trend over
the next 12 hours? Explain.

Time Decimal time Temp (°F)


The given data: 10:00 AM 10.0 100.00
10:30 AM 10.5 100.45
11:00 AM 11.0 100.90
11:30 AM 11.5 101.35
12:45 PM 12.75 102.48

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

103
102.5
102
temp (F)

101.5
101
100.5
100
99.5
10 11 12 13
time (hours)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

(a) Reading from the graph: 101.8 F.

T2  T1 101.8 F  100.0 F
(b) slope    0.9 F/hour
t 2  t1 12.0 hr  10.0 hr

(c) No.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Math Skills
•The SI System of Units
•Dimensional Analysis

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Clicker Question for after slide 13:

If you have one circle with a radius of 5 cm and a second


circle with a radius of 3 cm, by what factor is the area of
the first circle larger than the area of the second circle?
(Use the fact that Ar2.)
A. 0.60
B. 1.67
C. 2.78
D. 8.73

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 2: Force

•Forces
•Newton’s First and Third Laws
•Vector Addition
•Gravity
•Contact Forces
•Tension
•Fundamental Forces

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.1 Forces

Isaac Newton was the first to discover that the laws that
govern motions on the Earth also applied to celestial bodies.

Over the next few chapters we will study how bodies interact
with one another.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Simply, a force is a “push” or “pull” on an object.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

How can a force be measured? One way is with a spring


scale.

By hanging masses on a
spring we find that the
spring stretchapplied
force.

The units of force are Newtons (N).


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Vectors versus scalars:

A vector is a quantity that has both a magnitude and a


direction. A force is an example of a vector quantity.

A scalar is just a number (no direction). The mass of an


object is an example of a scalar quantity.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Notation:


Vector: F or F

The magnitude of a vector: F or F or F .

The direction of vector might be “35 south of east”; “20


above the +x-axis”; or….

Scalar: m (not bold face; no arrow)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.2 Net Force

The net force is the vector sum of all the forces acting
on a body.

Fnet  F  F1  F2  F3  

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To graphically represent a vector,


draw a directed line segment.

The length of the line can be used to represent the vector’s


length or magnitude.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To add vectors graphically they must be placed “tip to tail”.


The result (F1 + F2) points from the tail of the first vector to
the tip of the second vector.

F1 F2

Fnet

For collinear vectors:

F1

F2
Fnet

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.3 Newton’s First Law

Newton’s 1st Law (The Law of Inertia):


If no force acts on an object, then its speed and direction of
motion do not change.

Inertia is a measure of an object’s


resistance to changes in its motion.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the object is at rest, it remains at rest (speed = 0).


If the object is in motion, it continues to move in a straight
line with the same speed.

No force is required to keep a body in straight line motion


when effects such as friction are negligible.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An object is in translational equilibrium if the net force on


it is zero.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Free Body Diagrams:

•Must be drawn for problems when forces are involved.

•Must be large so that they are readable.

•Draw an idealization of the body in question (a dot, a


box,…). You will need one free body diagram for each
body in the problem that will provide useful information
for you to solve the given problem.

•Indicate only the forces acting on the body. Label the


forces appropriately. Do not include the forces that this
body exerts on any other body.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Free Body Diagrams (continued):

•A coordinate system is a must.

•Do not include fictitious forces. Remember that ma is itself


not a force!

•You may indicate the direction of the body’s acceleration or


direction of motion if you wish, but it must be done well off to
the side of the free body diagram.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.4 Vector Addition

Vector Addition: Place the vectors tip to tail as before. A


vector may be moved any way you please provided that you
do not change its length nor rotate it. The resultant points
from the tail of the first vector to the tip of the second (A+B).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Vector A has a length of 5.00 meters and points


along the x-axis. Vector B has a length of 3.00 meters and
points 120 from the +x-axis. Compute A+B (=C).

B
C

120
A x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
y opp
sin  
hyp
adj
B cos 
hyp
By sin opp
120 tan  
60 cos adj
Bx A x

By
sin 60   B y  B sin 60  3.00m sin 60  2.60 m
B
 Bx
cos60   Bx   Bcos60  3.00m cos60  1.50 m
B

and Ax = 5.00 m and Ay = 0.00 m


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
C x  Ax  Bx  5.00 m  - 1.50 m  3.50 m
The components of C:
C y  Ay  B y  0.00 m  2.60 m  2.60 m

The length of C is:


C
2 2
Cy = 2.60 m C  C  Cx  C y
  3.50 m 2  2.60 m 2
Cx = 3.50 m x
 4.36 m

Cy 2.60 m
The direction of C is: tan     0.7429
Cx 3.50 m
  tan 1 0.7429   36.6 From the +x-axis
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.5 Newton’s Third Law


Newton’s 3rd Law:
When 2 bodies interact, the forces on the bodies from each
other are always equal in magnitude and opposite in
direction. Or, forces come in pairs.

Mathematically: F21  F12 .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Consider a box resting on a table.

(a) If F1 is the force of the Earth


F1 on the box, what is the interaction
partner of this force?

The force of the box on the Earth.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

F2 (b) If F2 is the force of the box on the


table, what is the interaction partner
of this force?

The force of the table on the box.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

External forces:

Any force on a system from a body outside of the system.

F
Pulling a box
across the floor

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Internal forces:

Force between bodies of a system.

Fext

Pulling 2 boxes across the floor


where the two boxes are attached
to each other by a rope.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.6 Gravity
Gravity is the force between two masses. Gravity is a long-
range or field force. No contact is needed between the
bodies. The force of gravity is always attractive!

GM 1M 2 r is the distance between the two masses


F
r2 M1 and M2 and G = 6.6710-11 Nm2/kg2.

F12 F21
M1 M2
F21  F12 .
r
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

 GM E 
Let M1 = mass of the Earth. F  2 M 2
 r 

Here F = the force the Earth exerts on mass M2. This is the
force known as weight, w.

 GM E  M E  5.98  10 24 kg
w   2  M 2  gM 2 .

 rE  rE  6400 km

GM E 2 Near the surface


where g  2
 9 . 8 N/kg  9 . 8 m/s
rE of the Earth

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

F is the gravitational force per unit mass.


Note that g 
m This is called the gravitational field
strength. It is often referred to as the
acceleration due to gravity.

What is the direction of g?

What is the direction of w?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the weight of a 100 kg astronaut on the


surface of the Earth (force of the Earth on the astronaut)?
How about in low Earth orbit? This is an orbit about 300 km
above the surface of the Earth.

On Earth: w  mg  980 N

 GM E 
In low Earth orbit: w  mg ( ro )  m   890 N
 RE  h  

Their weight is reduced by about 10%. The


astronaut is NOT weightless!

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.7 Contact Forces

Contact forces: these forces arise because of an


interaction between the atoms in the surfaces in contact.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Normal force: this force acts in the direction perpendicular


to the contact surface.

N Force of the
ground on
the box

w Force of the
N ramp on the
box

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Consider a box on a table. y


N
FBD for
box
x

w
Apply
Newton’s F y  N w0
2nd law So that N  w  mg

This just says the magnitude of the


normal force equals the magnitude
of the weight; they are not Newton’s
third law interaction partners.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Friction: a contact force parallel to the contact surfaces.

Static friction acts to prevent objects from sliding.

Kinetic friction acts to make sliding objects slow down.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Static Friction:

The force of static friction is modeled as f s  s N.


where s is the coefficient of static friction and N is the
normal force.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Kinetic Friction:

The force of kinetic friction is modeled as f k  k N .


where k is the coefficient of kinetic friction and N is the
normal force.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 2.91): A box full of books rests on a


wooden floor. The normal force the floor exerts on the box is
250 N.
(a) You push horizontally on the box with a force of 120
N, but it refuses to budge. What can you say about the
coefficient of friction between the box and the floor?

y
N
FBD for
box F
x
fs
w Apply (1) Fy  N  w  0
Newton’s
2nd Law (2) Fx  F  f s  0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

F
From (2): F  f s   s N   s   0.48
N
This is the minimum value of s, so s > 0.48.

(b) If you must push horizontally on the box with 150 N force
to start it sliding, what is the coefficient of static friction?

F
Again from (2): F  f s   s N   s   0.60
N
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
(c) Once the box is sliding, you only have to push with a
force of 120 N to keep it sliding. What is the coefficient of
kinetic friction?
y
N
FBD for Apply (1) Fy  N  w  0
box F Newton’s
x 2nd Law (2) Fx  F  f k  0
fk
w

From 2: F  f k  k N
F 120 N
k    0.48
N 250 NCopyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.8 Tension

This is the force transmitted through a “rope” from one end


to the other.

An ideal cord has zero mass, does not stretch, and the
tension is the same throughout the cord.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 2.73): A pulley is hung from the ceiling by a


rope. A block of mass M is suspended by another rope that
passes over the pulley and is attached to the wall. The rope
fastened to the wall makes a right angle with the wall. Neglect the
masses of the rope and the pulley. Find the tension in the rope
from which the pulley hangs and the angle . y

T
FDB for the
mass M
x

w
Apply Newton’s 2nd
Law to the mass M.
F y T w0
T  w  Mg
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

FBD for the pulley: Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:


y
F x  F cos   T  0

F
F y  F sin   T  0
T
 T  F cos   F sin 
x
This statement is true
only when  = 45 and
T
F  2T  2 Mg

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§2.9 Fundamental Forces

The four fundamental forces of nature are:


•Gravity which is the force between two masses; it is the
weakest of the four.
•Strong Force which helps to bind atomic nuclei together;
it is the strongest of the four.
•Weak Force plays a role in some nuclear reactions.
•Electromagnetic is the force that acts between charged
particles.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Newton’s First and Third Law’s


•Free Body Diagrams
•Adding Vectors
•Contact Forces Versus Long-Range Forces
•Different Forces (friction, gravity, normal, tension)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What is the net force acting on the object shown below?

15 N 15 N
x

10 N

a. 40 N
b. 0 N
c. 10 N down
d. 10 N up
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The gravitational field strength of the Moon is about 1/6


that of Earth. If the mass and weight of an astronaut, as
measured on Earth, are m and w respectively, what will
they be on the Moon?

a. m, w
1
b. m, w
6
1
c. m, w
6
1 1
d. m, w
6 6
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 3: Acceleration and


Newton’s Second Law of Motion

•Position & Displacement


•Speed & Velocity
•Acceleration
•Newton’s Second Law
•Relative Velocity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§3.1 Position & Displacement

The position (r) of an object describes its location relative to


some origin or other reference point.

The displacement is the change in an object’s position. It


depends only on the beginning and ending positions.

r  r f  ri
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 3.4): Margaret walks to the store


using the following path: 0.500 miles west, 0.200 miles north,
0.300 miles east. What is her total displacement? Give the
magnitude and direction.

y Take north to be in
the +y direction and
east to be along +x.
r3
r
r2

r1 x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The displacement is r = rf – ri. The initial position is the


origin; what is rf?

The final position will be rf = r1 + r2 + r3. The components


are rfx = -r1 + r3 = -0.2 miles and rfy = +r2 = +0.2 miles.

y
Using the figure, the magnitude and
r
direction of the displacement are
ry
 r  rx2  ry2  0.283 miles
rx x
ry
tan    1 and   45 N of W.
rx Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§3.2 Velocity

Velocity is a vector that measures how fast and in what


direction something moves.

Speed is the magnitude of the velocity. It is a scalar.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

r  x 
Average velocity  v av   The x - component would be : v av, x  
t  t 

finish

Path of a vav is the constant speed


particle that results in the same
displacement in a given
time interval.
r

Start
distance traveled
Average speed 
time of trip
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A particle moves along the blue path as shown. At time t1 its


position is r0 and at time t2 its position is rf.
y

The instantaneous
v0 velocity points
r vf tangent to the path.

r0 rf

r
v av  Points in the direction of r
t Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

On a graph of position versus time, the average velocity is


represented by the slope of a chord.

x (m)

x2
x1

t1 t2 t (sec)

x2  x1
Average velocity  vav , x 
t 2  t1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

r
Instantaneous velocity  v  lim
t  0 t

This is represented by the slope of a line tangent to the curve


on the graph of an object’s position versus time.

x (m)

t (sec)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The area under a velocity versus time graph (between the


curve and the time axis) gives the displacement in a given
interval of time.

v(m/s)

t (sec)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Consider Margaret’s walk to the store in the


example on slides 3 and 4. If the first leg of her walk takes 10
minutes, the second takes 8 minutes, and the third 7 minutes,
compute her average velocity and average speed during each
leg and for the overall trip.

Use the definitions:

r
Average velocity  v av 
t
distance traveled
Average speed 
time of trip

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

t vav Average
Leg (hours) (miles/hour) speed
(miles/hour)
1 0.167 3.00 (west) 3.00

2 0.133 1.50 (north) 1.50

3 0.117 2.56 (east) 2.56

Total 0.417 0.679 2.40


trip (45 N of W)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 3.20): Speedometer readings are


obtained and graphed as a car comes to a stop along a
straight-line path. How far does the car move between
t = 0 and t =16 seconds?

Since there is not a reversal of direction, the area


between the curve and the time axis will represent the
distance traveled. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The rectangular portion has an area of Lw = (20 m/s)(4 s)


= 80 m.
The triangular portion has an area of ½bh = ½(8 s) (20 m/s)
= 80 m.
Thus, the total area is 160 m. This is the distance traveled
by the car.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§3.3 Newton’s Second Law of


Motion

A nonzero acceleration changes an object’s state of motion.

v These have
Average acceleration  a av 
t interpretations
similar to vav
v
Instantaneous acceleration  a  lim and v.
t 0 t

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A particle moves along the blue path as shown. At time t1 its


position is r0 and at time t2 its position is rf.
y
v Points in the
a av 
v0
t direction of v.
v
vf

r0 rf

The instantaneous acceleration


can point in any direction. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 3.31): If a car traveling at 28 m/s is


brought to a full stop 4.0 s after the brakes are applied, find
the average acceleration during braking.

Given: vi = +28 m/s, vf = 0 m/s, and t = 4.0 s.

v 0  28 m/s
aav    7.0 m/s 2
t 4.0 s

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 3.39): At the beginning of a 3 hour trip


you are traveling due north at 192 km/hour. At the end, you
are traveling 240 km/hour at 45 west of north.

(a) Draw the initial and final velocity vectors.

y (north)

vf v0

x (east)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Find v.

The components are


v x  v fx  vox  v f sin 45  0  170 km/hr
v y  v fy  voy   v f cos 45  v0  22.3 km/hr

2 2
v  v x  v y  171 km/hr

v y South of
tan    0.1312    tan 1 0.1312   7.5
v x west

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) What is aav during the trip?

vx  170 km/hr


v a x ,av    56.7 km/hr 2
a av  t 3 hr
t v y  22.3 km/hr
a y ,av    7.43 km/hr 2
t
t 3 hr

The magnitude and direction are:

a av  a x2,av  a y2,av  57.2 km/hr 2


a y ,av
tan    0.1310    tan 1 (0.1310)  7.5 South of west
a x ,av
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Newton’s 2nd Law:


The acceleration of a body is directly proportional to the net
force acting on the body and inversely proportional to the
body’s mass.

Fnet
Mathematically: a or Fnet  ma
m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An object’s mass is a measure of its inertia. The more mass,


the more force is required to obtain a given acceleration.

The net force is just the vector sum of all of the forces acting
on the body, often written as F.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If a = 0, then F = 0. This body can have:

Speed = 0 which is called static equilibrium, or


speed  0, but constant, which is called dynamic
equilibrium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§3.4 Applying Newton’s Second Law

F  ma
Force units: 1 N = 1 kg m/s2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Find the tension in the cord connecting the two


blocks as shown. A force of 10.0 N is applied to the right on
block 1. Assume a frictionless surface. The masses are m1
= 3.00 kg and m2 = 1.00 kg.

block 2 block 1 F

Assume that the rope stays taut so that both blocks


have the same acceleration.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

FBD for block 2: FBD for block 1:

y y
N1
N2

F
T T

x x

w2 w1
Apply Newton’s 2nd Law to each
block:
 Fx  T  m2 a  Fx  F  T  m1a
F y  N 2  w2  0 F y  N1  w1  0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

F  T  m1a (1) These two equations contain the


unknowns: a and T.
T  m2 a (2)

To solve for T, a must be eliminated. Solve for a in (2) and


substitute in (1).
T 
F  T  m1a  m1  
 m2 
T   m1 
F  m1    T  1 
  T
 m2   m2 
F 10 N
T    2.5 N
 m1   3 kg 
1   1  
 m2   1 kg 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A box slides across a rough surface. If the


coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.3, what is the acceleration of
the box?

y
FBD for Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:
box: N

F x   Fk  ma
Fk
x F y  N w0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(1)  Fk  ma
(2) N  w  0  N  w  mg

From (1):  Fk    k N    k mg  ma

Solving for a:

 
a    k g  0.3 9.8 m/s 2  2.94 m/s 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§3.5 Relative Velocity

Example: You are traveling in a car (A) at 60 miles/hour east


on a long straight road. The car (B) next to you is traveling
at 65 miles/hour east. What is the speed of car B relative to
car A?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

+x
t=0 t>0

A A rBA
rAG
B B
rBG

From the picture: rBG  rAG  rBA


rBA  rBG  rAG
Divide by t: v BA  v BG  v AG
v BA  65 miles/hr east - 60 miles/hr east
 5 miles/hour east Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: You are traveling in a car (A) at 60 miles/hour


east on a long straight road. The car (B) next to you is
traveling at 65 miles/hour west. What is the speed of car B
relative to car A?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

+x
t>0 t=0 t>0

A
rAG
A

rBG rBA
B B

From the picture: rBA  rBG  rAG


Divide by t: v BA  v BG  v AG
 65 miles/hr west - 60 miles/hr east
 125 miles/hr west Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary
•Position
•Displacement Versus Distance
•Velocity Versus Speed
•Acceleration
•Instantaneous Values Versus Average Values
•Newton’s Second Law
•Relative Velocity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Additional clicker question:

A ball incident on a wall has a speed of 10 m/s toward the


wall. It rebounds with a speed of 10 m/s. What is the
direction of the ball’s acceleration while it is in contact
with the wall?
A. Toward the wall
B. Away from the wall
C. Up the wall
D. Down the wall
E. The ball is not accelerated.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 4: Motion with a Changing


Velocity

•Motion Along a Line


•Graphical Representation of Motion
•Free Fall
•Projectile Motion
•Apparent Weight
•Air Resistance and Terminal Velocity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§4.1 Motion Along a Line

For constant acceleration the kinematic equations are:


1
x  x f  xi  vix t  a x t 2
2
v x  v fx  vix  a x t
2 2
v fx  vix  2a x x

x  vav , x t
Also: vix  v fx
vav , x 
2 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: In a previous example, a box sliding across a rough


surface was found to have an acceleration of -2.94 m/s2. If
the initial speed of the box is 10.0 m/s, how long does it take
for the box to come to rest?

Know: a= -2.94 m/s2, vix=10.0 m/s, vfx= 0.0 m/s


Want: t.

v x  vix  a x t  0
vix  10.0 m/s
t     2
 3.40 sec
ax -2.94 m/s

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 4.8): A train of mass 55,200 kg is


traveling along a straight, level track at 26.8 m/s. Suddenly
the engineer sees a truck stalled on the tracks 184 m ahead.
If the maximum possible braking force has magnitude
84.0 kN, can the train be stopped in time?

Know: vfx = 0 m/s, vix=26.8 m/s, x=184 m


Determine ax and compare to the train’s maximum ax.

2 2
v x  vix  2a x x  0
2
 vix
ax   1.95 m/s 2
2x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The train’s maximum acceleration is:

Fnet Fbraking
a x ,max    1.52 m/s 2
m m

The maximum acceleration is not sufficient to


stop the train before it hits the stalled truck.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§4.2 Visualizing Motion with


Constant Acceleration

Motion diagrams for three carts:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Graphs of x, vx, ax for each of the three carts

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 4.13): A trolley car in New Orleans


starts from rest at the St. Charles Street stop and has a
constant acceleration of 1.20 m/s2 for 12.0 seconds.

(a) Draw a graph of vx versus t.


16

14

12

10
v (m/sec)

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
t (sec)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) How far has the train traveled at the end of the 12.0
seconds?

The area between the curve and the time axis represents
the distance traveled.

1
x  vt  12 sec   t
2
1
 14.4 m/s 12 s   86.4 m
2

(c) What is the speed of the train at the end of the 12.0 s?

This can be read directly from the graph, vx=14.4 m/s.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§4.3 Free Fall

A stone is dropped from the edge of a cliff; if air resistance


can be ignored, the FBD for the stone is:
y

Apply Newton’s Second Law


x

w F y   w  mg  ma
 a   g  9.8 N/kg
 9.8 m/s 2

The stone is in free fall; only the force of gravity acts on


the stone. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: You throw a ball into the air with speed 15.0 m/s;
how high does the ball rise?
y
viy

Given: viy=+15.0 m/s; ay=-9.8 m/s2


x

ay

To calculate the final height, we 1


need to know the time of flight. y  viy t  a y t 2
2

Time of flight from: v fy  viy  a y t

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

v fy  viy  a y t  0
The ball rises
until vfy= 0. viy15.0 m/s
t     2
 1.53 sec
ay - 9.8 m/s

1
The height: y  viy t  a y t 2
2
1

 15.0 m/s 1.53 s    9.8 m/s 2 1.53 s 
2
2

 11.5 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 4.22): A penny is dropped from the


observation deck of the Empire State Building 369 m above
the ground. With what velocity does it strike the ground?
Ignore air resistance.
y
Given: viy=0 m/s, ay=-9.8 m/s2,
y=-369 m
x
ay
Unknown: vyf
369 m

2 2
Use: v fy  viy  2a y y
 2a y y
v yf  2a y y
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:


v yf  2a y y  2  9.8 m/s 2  369 m  85.0 m/s  (downward)

How long does it take for the penny to strike the ground?

Given: viy=0 m/s, ay=-9.8 m/s2, y=-369 m


Unknown: t
1 1
y  viy t  a y t 2  a y t 2
2 2
2y
 t   8.7 sec
ay Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§4.4 Projectile Motion

What is the motion of a struck baseball? Once it leaves


the bat (if air resistance is negligible) only the force of
gravity acts on the baseball.

The baseball has ax = 0 and ay = -g, it moves with


constant velocity along the x-axis and with nonzero,
constant acceleration along the y-axis.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: An object is projected from the origin. The initial


velocity components are vix = 7.07 m/s, and viy = 7.07 m/s.
Determine the x and y position of the object at 0.2 second
intervals for 1.4 seconds. Also plot the results.

1 1
y  viy t  a y t 2  a y t 2
2 2
x  vix t

Since the object starts from the origin, y and x


will represent the location of the object at time t.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

t (sec) x (meters) y (meters)


0 0 0
0.2 1.41 1.22
0.4 2.83 2.04
0.6 4.24 2.48
0.8 5.66 2.52
1.0 7.07 2.17
1.2 8.48 1.43
1.4 9.89 0.29

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

This is a plot of the x position (black points) and y position


(red points) of the object as a function of time.

12

10

8
x,y (m)

0
0 0.5 1 1.5
t (sec)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

This is a plot of the y position versus x position for the


object (its trajectory).

3
2.5
2
y (m)

1.5
1
0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
x (m)

The object’s path is a parabola.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 4.36): An arrow is shot into the air


with  = 60° and vi = 20.0 m/s.

(a) What are vx and vy of the arrow when t=3 sec?

y
The components of the initial
velocity are:
vix  vi cos   10.0 m/s
60°
x viy  vi sin   17.3 m/s

v fx  vix  a x t  vix  10.0 m/s


At t = 3 sec:
v fy  viy  a y t  viy  gt  12.1 m/s
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What are the x and y components of the displacement of


the arrow during the 3.0 sec interval?
y

x
1
rx  x  vix t  a x t 2  vix t  0  30.0 m
2
1 1
ry  y  viy t  a y t  viy t  gt 2  7.80 m
2

2 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: How far does the arrow in the previous example


land from where it is released?

1
The arrow lands when y=0. y  viy t  gt 2  0
2
2viy
Solving for t: t   3.53 sec
g

1
The distance traveled is: x  vix t  a x t 2
2
 vix t  0  35.3 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§4.5 Apparent Weight

Stand on a bathroom scale.

y
FBD:
N Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:

x F y  N  w  ma y

w N  mg  ma y

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The normal force is the force the scale exerts on you. By


Newton’s 3rd Law this is also the force (magnitude only) you
exert on the scale. A scale will read the normal force.

N  mg  a y  is what the scale reads.

When ay = 0, N = mg. The scale reads your true weight.

When ay0, N>mg or N<mg.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A woman of mass 51 kg is standing in an elevator.


If the elevator pushes up on her feet with 408 newtons of
force, what is the acceleration of the elevator?

y
FBD for
woman: N
Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:

x
F y  N  w  ma y
w N  mg  ma y (1)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Given: N = 408 newtons, m = 51 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2


Unknown: ay

N  mg
Solving (1) for ay: ay   1.8 m/s 2
m

The elevator could be (1) traveling upward with


decreasing speed, or (2) traveling downward
with increasing speed.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§4.6 Air Resistance


A stone is dropped from the edge of a cliff; if air resistance
cannot be ignored, the FBD for the stone is:
y
Fd Apply Newton’s Second Law
x

w
F y  Fd  w  ma

Where Fd is the magnitude of the drag


force on the stone. This force is
directed opposite the object’s velocity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Assume that Fd  bv 2

b is a parameter that depends on the


size and shape of the object.

Since Fdv2, can the object be in equilibrium?

F y  Fd  w  ma
bv 2  mg  0
mg
yes, when v  vt 
b
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 4.61): A paratrooper with a fully


loaded pack has a mass of 120 kg. The force due to air
resistance has a magnitude of Fd = bv2 where
b = 0.14 N s2/m2.

(a) If he/she falls with a speed of 64 m/s, what is the


force of air resistance?

2
Fd  bv  0.14 N s /m  2 2
64 m/s  2
 570 N

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the paratrooper’s acceleration?

y
FBD: Apply Newton’s Second Law and
Fd
solve for a.
x

w
F y  Fd  w  ma
Fd  mg
 5.1 m/s 2 a
m
(c) What is the paratrooper’s terminal speed?
F y  Fd  w  ma  0
bvt2  mg  0
mg
vt   92 m/s
b Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•The Kinematic Equations


•Graphical Representations of Motion
•Applications of Newton’s Second Law & Kinematics
(free fall, projectiles, accelerated motion, air drag)
•Terminal Velocity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 5: Circular Motion

•Uniform Circular Motion


•Radial Acceleration
•Banked and Unbanked Curves
•Circular Orbits
•Nonuniform Circular Motion
•Tangential and Angular Acceleration
•Artificial Gravity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.1 Uniform Circular Motion


y

Consider an object moving v


in a circular path of radius r
at constant speed.
v

x
Here, v0. The direction v
of v is changing.

v
If v0, then a0. The
net force cannot be zero.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Conclusion: to move in a circular path, an object must have


a nonzero net force acting on it.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

f  is the angular position.


Angular displacement:
 i

x
   f   i

Note: angles measured CW are negative and angles


measured CCW are positive.  is measured in radians.

2 radians = 360 =1 revolution


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The average and instantaneous angular velocities are:

 
av  and   lim
t t 0 t

 is measured in rads/sec.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

f arclength = s = r
r

 i

s  is a ratio of two lengths; it is


 
r a dimensionless ratio!
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An object moves along a


f circular path of radius r; what
is its average speed?
r i


total distance r   


vav    r   r av
total time t  t 

Also, v  r (instantaneous values).


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The time it takes to go one time around a closed path is


called the period (T).

total distance 2r


vav  
total time T

2
Comparing to v=r:    2f
T

f is called the frequency, the number of revolutions (or


cycles) per second.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.2 Centripetal Acceleration


The velocity of a particle is tangent to its path.

For an object moving in uniform circular motion, the


acceleration is radially inward. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnitude of the radial acceleration is:

v2
ar   r 2  v
r

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 5.14): The rotor is an amusement


park ride where people stand against the inside of a cylinder.
Once the cylinder is spinning fast enough, the floor drops out.

(a) What force keeps the people from falling out the bottom of
the cylinder? y

fs
Draw an FBD for a person
N
with their back to the wall:
x

It is the force of static friction.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) If s = 0.40 and the cylinder has r = 2.5 m, what is the


minimum angular speed of the cylinder so that the people
don’t fall out?
1  Fx  N  mar  m 2 r
Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:
2  Fy  f s  w  0

From (1)
From (2): fs  w
 s N   s m 2 r   mg
g 9.8 m/s 2
    3.13 rad/s
sr 0.402.5 m 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 5.79): A coin is placed on a record


that is rotating at 33.3 rpm. If s = 0.1, how far from the
center of the record can the coin be placed without having it
slip off?
y
Draw an FBD for the coin:
N

fs
x

Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:


w
1  Fx  f s  mar  m 2
r
2  Fy  N  w  0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
From (2)
From 1 : f s  m 2 r
f s   s N   s mg   m 2 r

s g
Solving for r: r  2 What is ?

rev  2 rad  1 min 


  33.3     3.5 rad/s
min  1 rev  60 sec 

 s g 0.19.8 m/s 2 
r  2  2
 0.08 m
 3.50 rad/s 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.3 Unbanked and Banked Curves

Example (text problem 5.20): A highway curve has a radius


of 122 m. At what angle should the road be banked so that
a car traveling at 26.8 m/s has no tendency to skid sideways
on the road? (Hint: No tendency to skid means the frictional
force is zero.)

Take the car’s motion


to be into the page.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
y

FBD for the car: N


Apply Newton’s Second Law:


v2
1  Fx  N sin   mar  m
r
2  Fy  N cos   w  0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
v2
1 N sin   m
Rewrite (1) and (2): r
2 N cos  mg

Divide (1) by (2):

2
tan  
v

26.8 m/s  2
 0.6007
gr 9.8 m/s 122 m 
2
 
  31.0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.4 Circular Orbits


Consider an object of mass m in a
r circular orbit about the Earth.

Earth
The only force on the satellite is the force
of gravity:
Gms M e v2
 F  Fg  r 2  ms ar  ms r
Gms M e v2
2
 ms
r r
Solve for the speed of the satellite:
GM e
vCopyright
 © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l. 18
r
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: How high above the surface of the Earth does a


satellite need to be so that it has an orbit period of 24 hours?

GM e 2r
From previous slide: v Also need, v
r T

1
3
 GM e 2 
Combine these expressions and solve for r: r   2
T 
 4 
1
 11
 6.67 10 Nm /kg 5.98  10 kg
r  
2 2
2
86400 s    24
 3

2
 4 
 4.225  107 m

r  Re  h  h  r  Re  35,000 km
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

1
3
 GM e 2 
r  2
T  is Kepler’s Third Law.
 4 

1
3
 GM 2 
It can be generalized to: r  2 T 
 4 

Where M is the mass of the central body. For example, it


would be Msun if speaking of the planets in the solar system.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.5 Nonuniform Circular Motion

Here, the speed is not constant.

at
a
There is now an acceleration
ar tangent to the path of the particle.

2 2
The net acceleration of the body is a  ar  at
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

at
a
at changes the magnitude of v.
ar ar changes the direction of v.

Can write:
 F  ma
r r

 F  ma
t t

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the minimum speed for the car so that it


maintains contact with the loop when it is in the pictured
position?

r
FBD for the car at
the top of the loop:
y

Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:


v2
x  Fy   N  w  mar  m r
N w v2
N wm
r
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
v2
N wm
r
The apparent weight at the top of loop is:
 v2 
N  m  g 

 r 

 v2 
N  m  g   0
N = 0 when  r 
v  gr

This is the minimum speed needed to make it around the


loop.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Consider the car at the bottom of the loop; how does the
apparent weight compare to the true weight?

FBD for the car at the Apply Newton’s 2nd Law:


bottom of the loop:
v2
y  Fy  N  w  mac  m r
N
v2
N wm
r
 v2 
x N  m  g 

w  r 

Here, N  mg
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.6 Angular Acceleration

The average and instantaneous angular acceleration


are:
 
 av  and   lim
t t  0 t

 is measured in rads/sec2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The kinematic equations:

Linear Angular

v  v0  at    0  t
1 2 1 2
x  x0  v0t  at    0  0 t  t
2 2
2 2
v  v0  2ax  2  0 2  2

With vt  r and at  r

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 5.66): A high speed dental drill is


rotating at 3.14104 rads/sec. Through how many degrees
does the drill rotate in 1.00 sec?

Given:  = 3.14104 rads/sec;  = 0


Want .

1 2
   0   0 t  t
2
   0  0t

   0t  3.14 10 rads/sec 1.0 sec  4

4 6
 3.14 10 rads  1.80  10 degrees
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 5.81): Your car’s wheels are 65 cm in


diameter and are spinning at =101 rads/sec. How fast in
km/hour is the car traveling, assuming no slipping?

total distance 2r N 2r


v    r
total time T N T
 101 rads/sec32.5 cm 
 3.28  103 cm/sec  118 km/hr
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§5.7 Artificial Gravity

A large rotating cylinder in


deep space (g0).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

FBD for person at FBD for person at


the bottom position the top position
y
y
N

x
x

Apply Newton’s 2nd Law to each:


2 2
 y
F  N  ma r  m r  y
F   N   ma r   m r

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 5.56): A space station is shaped like


a ring and rotates to simulate gravity. If the radius of the
space station is 120m, at what frequency must it rotate so
that it simulates Earth’s gravity?

Using the result from


the previous slide: 2
 y
F  N  ma r  m  r
N mg g
    0.28 rad/sec
mr mr r

The frequency is f =(/2) = 0.045 Hz (or 2.7 rpm).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•A net force MUST act on an object that has circular motion.


•Radial Acceleration ar=v2/r
•Definition of Angular Quantities (, , and )
•The Angular Kinematic Equations
•The Relationships Between Linear and Angular Quantities
vt  r and at  r
•Uniform and Nonuniform Circular Motion
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 6: Conservation of Energy

•Work by a Constant Force


•Kinetic Energy
•Potential Energy
•Work by a Variable Force
•Springs and Hooke’s Law
•Conservation of Energy
•Power

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.1 The Law of Conservation of


Energy

The total energy of the Universe is unchanged by any


physical process.

The three kinds of energy are: kinetic energy, potential


energy, and rest energy. Energy may be converted from
one form to another or transferred between bodies.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.2 Work by a Constant Force

Work is an energy transfer by the application of a force. For


work to be done there must be a nonzero displacement.

The unit of work and energy is the joule (J). 1 J = 1 Nm =


1 kg m2/s2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

It is only the force in the direction of the displacement that


does work.
An FBD for the box at left:
F y
rx rx

N

 x
w F

The work done by the force F is:

WF  Fx rx  F cos  x


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The work done by the force N is: WN  0

The normal force is perpendicular to the displacement.

The work done by gravity (w) is: Wg  0

The force of gravity is perpendicular to the displacement.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The net work done on the box is:

Wnet  WF  WN  Wg
 F cos  x  0  0
 F cos  x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

In general, the work done by a force F is defined as

W  Fr cos 
where F is the magnitude of the force, r is the magnitude
of the object’s displacement, and  is the angle between F
and r (drawn tail-to-tail).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A ball is tossed straight up. What is the work done


by the force of gravity on the ball as it rises?

y
r
FBD for
rising ball:
x

w
Wg  wy cos180
  mgy

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A box of mass m is towed up a frictionless incline at


constant speed. The applied force F is parallel to the incline.
What is the net work done on the box?
y
F

F N
x



w
Apply Newton’s
2nd Law: F
x  F  w sin   0
F
y  N  w cos   0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The magnitude of F is: F  mg sin 


If the box travels along the ramp a distance of x the
work by the force F is

WF  Fx cos 0  mgx sin 

The work by gravity is

Wg  wx cos  90   mgx sin 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The work by the normal force is:

WN  Nx cos 90  0

The net work done on the box is:

Wnet  WF  Wg  WN
 mgx sin   mgx sin   0
0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the net work done on the box in the


previous example if the box is not pulled at constant speed?

F x  F  w sin   ma
 F  ma  w sin 

Proceeding as before:

Wnet  WF  Wg  WN
 ma  mgx sin    mgx sin   0
 ma x  Fnet x
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.3 Kinetic Energy

1 2 is an object’s translational
K  mv
2 kinetic energy.

This is the energy an object has because of its state of


motion.

It can be shown that, in general Wnet  K .


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: The extinction of the dinosaurs and the majority of


species on Earth in the Cretaceous Period (65 Myr ago) is
thought to have been caused by an asteroid striking the Earth
near the Yucatan Peninsula. The resulting ejecta caused
widespread global climate change.

If the mass of the asteroid was 1016 kg (diameter in the


range of 4-9 miles) and had a speed of 30.0 km/sec,
what was the asteroid’s kinetic energy?

1 2 1 16
K  mv  10 kg 30 103 m/s
2 2
   2

24
 4.5  10 J
This is equivalent to ~109 Megatons of TNT.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.4 Gravitational Potential Energy


Part 1

Objects have potential energy because of their location (or


configuration).

There are potential energies associated with different (but


not all!) forces. Such a force is called a conservative
force.

In general Wcons  U


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The change in gravitational potential energy (only near the


surface of the Earth) is

U g  mgy

where y is the change in the object’s vertical position with


respect to some reference point that you are free to choose.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the change in gravitational potential


energy of the box if it is placed on the table? The table is
1.0 m tall and the mass of the box is 1.0 kg.

First: Choose the reference level at the floor. U=0 here.

U g  mgy  mg  y f  yi 
 
 1.0 kg  9.8 m/s 2 1.0 m  0 m   9.8 J
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Now take the reference level (U=0) to be on top of the table


so that yi = -1.0 m and yf = 0.0 m.

U g  mgy  mg  y f  yi 
 
 1 kg  9.8 m/s 2 0.0m   1.0 m   9.8 J

The results do not depend on


the location of U=0.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Mechanical energy is E  K U

Whenever nonconservative forces do no work, the


mechanical energy of a system is conserved. That is Ei=Ef
or K= -U.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 6.27): A cart starts from position 4 with


v = 15.0 m/s to the left. Find the speed of the cart at
positions 1, 2, and 3. Ignore friction.

E 4  E3
U 4  K4  U 3  K3
1 2 1 2
mgy4  mv4  mgy3  mv3
2 2
v3  v42  2 g  y4  y3   20.5 m/s
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

E4  E2 Or use
U 4  K4  U 2  K2 E3=E2
1 1
mgy4  mv42  mgy2  mv22
2 2
v2  v42  2 g  y4  y2   18.0 m/s

E4  E1 Or use
U 4  K 4  U 1  K1 E3=E1
1 2 1 2 E2=E1
mgy4  mv4  mgy1  mv1
2 2
v1  v42  2 g  y4  y1   24.8 m/s
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 6.82): A roller coaster car is about to


roll down a track. Ignore friction and air resistance.

m=988 kg

40 m

20 m

y=0

(a) At what speed does the car reach the top of the loop?
Ei  E f
U i  Ki  U f  K f
1 2
mgyi  0  mgy f  mv f
2
v f  2 g  yi  y f   19.8 m/s
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the force exerted on the car by the track at the top
of the loop?

FBD for the car:


y
Apply Newton’s Second Law:
v2
 Fy   N  w  mar  m r
x
v2
N wm
N w r
v2
N  m  mg  2.9 10 4 N
r
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) From what minimum height above the bottom of the track
can the car be released so that it does not lose contact with
the track at the top of the loop?

Using conservation of mechanical energy:

Ei  E f
U i  Ki  U f  K f
1 2
mgyi  0  mgy f  mvmin
2
2
vmin
Solve for the starting height yi  y f 
2g
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

What is vmin? v=vmin when N=0. This means that

v2
N wm
r
2
vmin
w  mg  m
r
vmin  gr

The initial height must be


2
vmin gr
yi  y f   2r   2.5r  25.0 m
2g 2g Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What do you do when there are nonconservative forces?


For example, if friction is present

E  E f  Ei  Wfric

The work done


by friction.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.5 Gravitational Potential Energy


Part 2

The general expression for gravitational potential energy is:

GM 1M 2
U r   
r
where U r     0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the gravitational potential energy of a


body of mass m on the surface of the Earth?

GM 1M 2 GM e m
U r  Re    
r Re

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.6 Work by a Variable Force

Work can be calculated by finding the area underneath a plot


of the applied force in the direction of the displacement
versus the displacement.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the work done by the variable force shown


below?
Fx (N)
F3

F2

F1

x1 x2 x3 x (m)

The work done by F1 is W1  F1  x1  0 


The work done by F2 is W2  F2  x2  x1 
The work done by F3 is W3  F3  x3  x2 

The net work is then W1+W2+W3. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

By hanging masses on a spring we find that stretch 


applied force. This is Hooke’s law.

For an ideal spring: Fx = -kx

Fx is the magnitude of the force exerted by the free end of


the spring, x is the measured stretch of the spring, and k is
the spring constant (a constant of proportionality; its units
are N/m).

A larger value of k implies a stiffer spring.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 6.48): (a) If forces of 5.0 N applied to


each end of a spring cause the spring to stretch 3.5 cm from
its relaxed length, how far does a force of 7.0 N cause the
same spring to stretch?

F1 x1
For springs Fx. This allows us to write  .
F2 x2

F2  7. 0 N 
Solving for x2: x2  x1   3.5 cm   4.9 cm.
F1  5.0 N 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the spring constant of this spring?

F1 5.0 N
k   1.43 N/cm.
x1 3.5 cm

Or

F2 7.0 N
k   1.43 N/cm.
x2 4.9 cm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 6.46): An ideal spring has k = 20.0


N/m. What is the amount of work done (by an external
agent) to stretch the spring 0.40 m from its relaxed length?

Fx (N)

kx1

x (m)
x1=0.4 m

W  Area under curve


1 1 2 1 2
 kx1  x1   kx1  20.0 N/m 0.4 m   1.6 J
2 2 2 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.7 Elastic potential energy

The work done in stretching/compressing a spring transfers


energy to the spring.

1 2
U s  kx
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A box of mass 0.25 kg slides along a horizontal,


frictionless surface with a speed of 3.0 m/s. The box
encounters a spring with k = 200 N/m. How far is the spring
compressed when the box is brought to rest?

Ei  E f
U i  Ki  U f  K f
1 2 1 2
0  mv  kx  0
2 2
 m
x   v  0.11 m

 k 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§6.8 Power

Power is the rate of energy transfer.

E
Average Power Pav 
t
Instantaneous Power P  Fv cos 

The unit of power is the watt. 1 watt = 1 J/s = 1 W.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 6.73): A race car with a mass of


500.0 kg completes a quarter-mile (402 m) race in a time of
4.2 s starting from rest. The car’s final speed is 125 m/s.
What is the engine’s average power output? Neglect friction
and air resistance.

E U  K
Pav  
t t
1 2
mv
K 2 f
   9.3  105 watts
t t

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Conservation of Energy
•Calculation of Work Done by a Constant or Variable
Force
•Kinetic Energy
•Potential Energy (gravitational, elastic)
•Power

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 7: Linear Momentum

•Definition of Momentum
•Impulse
•Conservation of Momentum
•Center of Mass
•Motion of the Center of Mass
•Collisions (1d, 2d; elastic, inelastic)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§7.1 Momentum

Consider two interacting bodies:

F21 F12

Fnet
If we know the net force on each body then v  at  t
m

The velocity change for each mass will be different if the


masses are different.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Rewrite the previous result for each body as:

m1v1  F21t

m2 v 2  F12 t  F21t

Combine the two results: m1v1  m2 v 2


m1 v1 f  v1i   m2 v 2 f  v 2i 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The quantity (mv) is called momentum (p).


p = mv and is a vector.

The unit of momentum is kg m/s; there is no derived unit for


momentum.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

From slide (3): m1v1  m2 v 2


p1  p 2

The change in momentum of the two bodies is “equal and


opposite”. Total momentum is conserved during the
interaction; the momentum lost by one body is gained by
the other.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§7.2 Impulse

Definition of impulse: p  Ft

One can also define an average impulse when the force


is variable.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text conceptual question 7.2): A force of 30 N is


applied for 5 sec to each of two bodies of different masses.
30 N
Take m1<m2
m1 or m2

(a) Which mass has the greater momentum change?

Since the same force is applied to


p  Ft each mass for the same interval, p
is the same for both masses.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Which mass has the greatest velocity change?

p Since both masses have the same p,


v  the smaller mass (mass 1) will have the
m larger change in velocity.

(c) Which mass has the greatest acceleration?

v Since av the mass with the greater


a velocity change will have the greatest
t
acceleration.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.9): An object of mass 3.0 kg is


allowed to fall from rest under the force of gravity for 3.4
seconds. What is the change in momentum? Ignore air
resistance.
Want p =mv.

v  at
v   gt  33.3 m/sec
 p  mv  100 kg m/s (downward)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.10): What average force is


necessary to bring a 50.0-kg sled from rest to 3.0 m/s in a
period of 20.0 seconds? Assume frictionless ice.

p  Fav t
p mv
 Fav  
t t
Fav 
50.0 kg 3.0 m/s 
 7.5 N The force will be
20.0 s in the direction
of motion.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§7.3 Conservation of Momentum


v1i
v2i m1>m2

m1 m2

A short time later the


masses collide.

m1 m2

What happens?
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

During the interaction:


y
N1 N2
x
F21 F12

w1 w2

F y  N1  w1  0 F y  N 2  w2  0
F x   F21  m1a1 F x  F12  m2 a2

There is no net
external force on
either mass. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The forces F12 and F21 are internal forces. This means that:

p1  p 2
p1 f  p1i  p 2 f  p 2i 
p1i  p 2i  p1 f  p 2 f

In other words, pi = pf. That is, momentum is conserved.


This statement is valid during the interaction only.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.18): A rifle has a mass of 4.5 kg and


it fires a bullet of 10.0 grams at a muzzle speed of 820 m/s.
What is the recoil speed of the rifle as the bullet leaves the
barrel?

As long as the rifle is horizontal, there will be no net


external force acting on the rifle-bullet system and
momentum will be conserved.

pi  p f
0  mb vb  mr vr
mb  0.01 kg 
 vr   vb   820 m/s  1.82 m/s
mr  4.5 kg 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§7.4 Center of Mass

The center of mass (CM) is the point representing the mean


(average) position of the matter in a body. This point need
not be located within the body.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The center of mass (of a two body system) is found from:

m1 x1  m2 x2
xcm 
m1  m2

This is a “weighted” average of the positions of the particles


that compose a body. (A larger mass is more important.)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

i
mr i i

In 3-dimensions write rcm  where mtotal   mi


m i
i i

The components of rcm are:

m x i i m y i i m z i
i i

xcm  i
ycm  i zcm 
m i m i m i
i
i i

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.27): Particle A is at the origin and has


a mass of 30.0 grams. Particle B has a mass of
10.0 grams. Where must particle B be located so that the
center of mass (marked with a red x) is located at the point
(2.0 cm, 5.0 cm)?

y
x ma xa  mb xb mb xb
xcm  
ma  mb ma  mb

ma ya  mb yb mb yb
ycm  
A x ma  mb ma  mb

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

10 g xb ycm 


10 g  yb  5 cm
xcm   2 cm
10 g  30g 30 g  10 g
xb  8 cm yb  20 cm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.30): The positions of three particles


are (4.0 m, 0.0 m), (2.0 m, 4.0 m), and (-1.0 m, -2.0 m). The
masses are 4.0 kg, 6.0 kg, and 3.0 kg respectively. What is
the location of the center of mass?

y 2

1 x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

m1 x1  m2 x2  m3 x3
xcm 
m1  m2  m3


4 kg 4 m   6 kg 2 m   3 kg  1 m 
4  6  3 kg
 1.92 m

m1 y1  m2 y2  m3 y3
ycm 
m1  m2  m3


4 kg 0 m   6 kg 4 m   3 kg  2 m 
4  6  3 kg
 1.38 m
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§7.5 Motion of the Center of Mass

For an extended body, it can be shown that p = mvcm.

From this it follows that Fext = macm.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.35): Body A has a mass of 3.0 kg


and vx = +14.0 m/s. Body B has a mass of 4.0 kg and has vy
= -7.0 m/s. What is the velocity of the center of mass of the
two bodies?

Consider a body made up of many different masses


each with a mass mi.

The position of each mass is ri and the displacement of


each mass is ri = vit.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
 m r i
i i

For the center of mass: rcm  v cm t 


m i
i

Solving for the velocity of the center of mass:


ri
 mi t
m v i i
v cm  i  i

 i
i
m m i
i

Or in component form:

m vi
i i, x m v i
i i, y
v cm,x  v cm, y 
m i
i m i
Copyright © 2008 – iThe McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Applying the previous formulas to the example,

ma va , x  mb vb , x
vcm , x 
ma  mb


3 kg 14 m/s   4 kg 0 m/s 
 6 m/s
3  4 kg

ma va , y  mb vb , y
vcm , y 
ma  mb


3 kg 0 m/s   4 kg  7 m/s 
 4 m/s
3  4 kg
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§§ 7.6 & 7.7 Collisions in One and


Two Dimension

When there are no external forces present, the momentum of


a system will remain unchanged. (pi = pf)

If the kinetic energy before and after an interaction is the


same, the “collision” is said to be perfectly elastic. If the
kinetic energy changes, the collision is inelastic.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If, after a collision, the bodies remain stuck together, the loss
of kinetic energy is a maximum. This type of collision is called
perfectly inelastic.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.41): In a railroad freight yard, an


empty freight car of mass m rolls along a straight level track
at 1.0 m/s and collides with an initially stationary, fully
loaded, boxcar of mass 4.0m. The two cars couple together
upon collision.
(a) What is the speed of the two cars after the collision?

pi  p f
p1i  p2i  p1 f  p2 f
m1v1  0  m1v  m2 v  m1  m2 v
 m1 
 v   v1  0.2 m/s
 m1  m2 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Suppose instead that both cars are at rest after the
collision. With what speed was the loaded boxcar moving
before the collision if the empty one had v1i = 1.0 m/s.

pi  p f
p1i  p2i  p1 f  p2 f
m1v1i  m2 v2i  0  0
 m1 
 v2i   v1i  0.25 m/s
 m2 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.49): A projectile of 1.0 kg mass


approaches a stationary body of 5.0 kg mass at 10.0 m/s and,
after colliding, rebounds in the reverse direction along the
same line with a speed of 5.0 m/s. What is the speed of the
5.0 kg mass after the collision?

pi  p f
p1i  p2i  p1 f  p2 f
m1v1i  0  m1v1 f  m2 v2 f
m1
v2 f  v1i  v1 f 
m2
1.0 kg
 10 m/s   5.0 m/s   3.0 m/s
5.0 kg
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 7.58): Body A of mass M has an


original velocity of 6.0 m/s in the +x-direction toward a
stationary body (B) of the same mass. After the collision,
body A has vx=+1.0 m/s and vy=+2.0 m/s. What is the
magnitude of body B’s velocity after the collision?

Final
Initial A

A vAi

B
B

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

x momentum: y momentum:
pix  p fx piy  p fy
p1ix  p2ix  p1 fx  p2 fx p1iy  p2iy  p1 fy  p2 fy
m1v1ix  0  m1v1 fx  m2 v2 fx 0  0  m1v1 fy  m2 v2 fy

Solve for v2fx: Solve for v2fy:


m1v1ix  m1v1 fx  m1v1 fy
v2 fx  v2 fy   v1 fy
m2 m2
 v1ix  v1 fx  2.00 m/s
 5.00 m/s

The mag. of v2 is v2 f  v 2 2 fy  v 2 2 fx  5.40 m/s


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Definition of Momentum
•Impulse
•Center of Mass
•Conservation of Momentum

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 8: Torque and Angular


Momentum
•Rotational Kinetic Energy
•Rotational Inertia
•Torque
•Work Done by a Torque
•Equilibrium (revisited)
•Rotational Form of Newton’s 2nd Law
•Rolling Objects
•Angular Momentum

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.1 Rotational KE and Inertia

For a rotating solid body:

n
1 1 1 1
K rot  m1v1  m2 v2    mn vn   mi vi2
2 2 2

2 2 2 i 1 2

For a rotating body vi=ri where ri is the distance from the


rotation axis to the mass mi.
n
1 2 1 n 2 2 1 2
K rot   mi ri     mi ri   I
i 1 2 2  i 1  2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

n
The quantity I   mi ri 2 is called rotational inertia or
i 1 moment of inertia.

Use the above expression when the number of masses


that make up a body is small. Use the moments of inertia
in table 8.1 for extended bodies.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: (a) Find the moment of inertia of the system below.


The masses are m1 and m2 and they are separated by a
distance r. Assume the rod connecting the masses is
massless.


r1 and r2 are the distances
between mass 1 and the
r1 r2 rotation axis and mass 2
m1 m2 and the rotation axis (the
dashed, vertical line)
respectively.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Take m1 = 2.00 kg, m2 = 1.00 kg,


r1= 0.33 m , and r2 = 0.67 m.
2
I   mi ri 2  m1r12  m2 r22  0.67 kg m 2
i 1

(b) What is the moment of inertia if the axis is moved so


that is passes through m1?

2
I   mi ri 2  m2 r22  1.00 kg m 2
i 1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.4): What is the rotational inertia of a


solid iron disk of mass 49.0 kg with a thickness of 5.00 cm
and a radius of 20.0 cm, about an axis through its center and
perpendicular to it?

From table 8.1:

1 1 2
I  MR  49.0 kg 0.2 m   0.98 kg m 2
2

2 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.2 Torque

A rotating (spinning) body will continue to rotate unless it


is acted upon by a torque.

hinge
Q: Where on a door do
you push to open it?
P
u
s
A: Far from the hinge.
h

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Torque method 1:

Top view of door F


F
Hinge 
end F||

  rF
r = the distance from the rotation axis (hinge) to the point
where the force F is applied.

F is the component of the force F that is perpendicular


to the door (here it is Fsin).
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The units of torque are Nm (not joules!).

By convention:

•When the applied force causes the object to rotate


counterclockwise (CCW) then  is positive.
•When the applied force causes the object to rotate
clockwise (CW) then  is negative.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Torque method 2:   r F

r is called the lever arm and F is the magnitude of the


applied force.

Lever arm is the perpendicular distance to the line of action


of the force.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Top view of door

r 
Hinge
end 

Line of
action of
Lever
the force
arm
r
sin   The torque is:   r F
r Same as
r  r sin   rF sin  before
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.12): The pull cord of a lawnmower


engine is wound around a drum of radius 6.00 cm, while the
cord is pulled with a force of 75.0 N to start the engine. What
magnitude torque does the cord apply to the drum?

F=75 N

  r F
 rF
R=6.00 cm
 0.06 m 75.0 N   4.5 Nm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Calculate the torque due to the three forces shown


about the left end of the bar (the red X). The length of the bar
is 4m and F2 acts in the middle of the bar.

F2=30 N
30
F3=20 N
10
X
45

F1=25 N

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Lever arm
for F2 F2=30 N
30
F3=20 N
10
X
45

F1=25 N

Lever arm
for F3
r1  0
The lever arms are: r2  2m sin 60  1.73 m
r3  4m sin 10  0.695 m
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

1  0
The torques are:  2   1.73 m 30 N   51.9 Nm
 3  0.695 m 20 N   13.9 Nm

The net torque is + 65.8 Nm and is the sum of the above


results.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.3 Work done by a Torque

The work done by a torque  is W   .

where  is the angle (in radians) the object turns through.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.25): A flywheel of mass 182 kg has a


radius of 0.62 m (assume the flywheel is a hoop).

(a) What is the torque required to bring the flywheel from


rest to a speed of 120 rpm in an interval of 30 sec?

rev  2 rad  1 min 


 f  120     12.6 rad/sec
min  1 rev  60 sec 

  
  rF  r ma   rmr   mr  
2

 t 
2
 f  i  2
f 
 mr    mr    29.4 Nm
 t   t 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
(b) How much work is done in this 30 sec period?

W     av t 
 i   f  f 
   t    t  5600 J
 2   2 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.4 Equilibrium

The conditions for equilibrium are:


F  0
τ  0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.36): A sign is supported by a uniform


horizontal boom of length 3.00 m and weight 80.0 N. A cable,
inclined at a 35 angle with the boom, is attached at a
distance of 2.38 m from the hinge at the wall. The weight of
the sign is 120.0 N. What is the tension in the cable and what
are the horizontal and vertical forces exerted on the boom by
the hinge?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
y

Fy T
FBD for the bar:

X
Fx x
wbar
Fsb

(1)  Fx  Fx  T cos   0
Apply the conditions for
equilibrium to the bar: (2)  Fy  Fy  wbar  Fsb  T sin   0
L
(3)    wbar    Fsb L   T sin  x  0
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

L
wbar    Fsb L 
T 2
Equation (3) can be solved for T:
x sin 
 352 N

Equation (1) can be solved for Fx: Fx  T cos   288 N

Fy  wbar  Fsb  T sin 


Equation (2) can be solved for Fy:
 2.00 N

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.5 Equilibrium in the Human


Body

Example (text problem 8.43): Find the force exerted by the


biceps muscle in holding a one liter milk carton with the
forearm parallel to the floor. Assume that the hand is 35.0
cm from the elbow and that the upper arm is 30.0 cm long.
The elbow is bent at a right angle and one tendon of the
biceps is attached at a position 5.00 cm from the elbow and
the other is attached 30.0 cm from the elbow. The weight of
the forearm and empty hand is 18.0 N and the center of
gravity is at a distance of 16.5 cm from the elbow.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Fb

“hinge”
(elbow
joint) Fca
w

  F x b 1  wx2  Fca x3  0
wx2  Fca x3
Fb   130 N
x1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.6 Rotational Form of Newton’s


2nd Law

  I

Compare to  F  ma

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.57): A bicycle wheel (a hoop) of


radius 0.3 m and mass 2 kg is rotating at 4.00 rev/sec. After
50 sec the wheel comes to a stop because of friction. What is
the magnitude of the average torque due to frictional forces?

rev  2 rad 
2 i  4.00    25.1 rad/sec
  I  MR  sec  1 rev 
f  0

  f  i
   0.50 rad/s 2
t t

2
 av  MR   0.09 Nm
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.7 Rolling Objects

An object that is rolling combines translational motion (its


center of mass moves) and rotational motion (points in the
body rotate around the center of mass).

For a rolling object: K tot  K T  K rot


1 2 1 2
 mvcm  I
2 2

If the object rolls without slipping then vcm = R. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Two objects (a solid disk and a solid sphere) are


rolling down a ramp. Both objects start from rest and from
the same height. Which object reaches the bottom of the
ramp first?

The object with the largest linear velocity (v) at the


bottom of the ramp will win the race.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Apply conservation of mechanical energy:


Ei  E f
U i  Ki  U f  K f
2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 v
mgh  0  0  mv  I  mv  I  
2 2 2 2 R
1 I 
mgh   m  2 v 2
2 R 
2mgh
Solving for v: v
 I 
 m  2 
 R 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
1
I disk  mR 2
2
The moments of inertia are: 2
I sphere  mR 2
5

4
For the disk: vdisk  gh
3 Since Vsphere> Vdisk the
sphere wins the race.
10
For the sphere: vsphere  gh
7

Compare these to a box sliding down the ramp. vbox  2 gh

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

How do objects in the previous example roll?


y

N
FBD:

Both the normal force and the weight act through the center
of mass so =0. This means that the object cannot rotate
when only these two forces are applied.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Add friction:
y   F r  Is

FBD: N  F  w sin   F  ma
x s cm
Fs
 F  N  w cos  0
y

 w Also need acm = R and

x
v 2  v02  2ax

The above system of equations can be solved for v at the


bottom of the ramp. The result is the same as when using
energy methods. (See text example 8.13.)

It is static friction that makes an object roll.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.8 Angular Momentum

p L
Fnet  lim  net  lim
t  0 t t 0 t

p  mv L  Iω
Units of p are kg m/s Units of L are kg m2/s

When no net external When no net external


forces act, the momentum torques act, the angular
of a system remains momentum of a system
constant (pi = pf) remains constant (Li = Lf).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.70): A turntable of mass 5.00 kg has


a radius of 0.100 m and spins with a frequency of 0.500
rev/sec. What is the angular momentum? Assume a uniform
disk.

rev  2 rad 
  0.500    3.14 rad/sec
sec  1 rev 

1 2
L  I   MR   0.079 kg m 2 /s
2 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 8.79): A skater is initially spinning at a


rate of 10.0 rad/sec with I=2.50 kg m2 when her arms are
extended. What is her angular velocity after she pulls her
arms in and reduces I to 1.60 kg m2?

He/she is on ice, so we can ignore external


torques.

Li  L f
I i i  I f  f
 Ii   2.50 kg m 2 
 f    1.60 kg m 2 10.0 rad/sec  15.6 rad/sec
i  

If   

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§8.9 The Vector Nature of Angular


Momentum

Angular momentum is a vector. Its direction is defined with


a right-hand rule.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Curl the fingers of your right hand so that they curl in the
direction a point on the object moves, and your thumb will
point in the direction of the angular momentum.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a person
holding a spinning
wheel. When viewed
from the front, the
wheel spins CCW.

Holding the wheel horizontal, they step on to a platform


that is free to rotate about a vertical axis.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Initially, nothing happens. They then move the wheel so


that it is over their head. As a result, the platform turns
CW (when viewed from above).

This is a result of conserving angular momentum.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Initially there is no angular momentum about the vertical axis.


When the wheel is moved so that it has angular momentum
about this axis, the platform must spin in the opposite
direction so that the net angular momentum stays zero.

Is angular momentum conserved about the


direction of the wheel’s initial, horizontal axis?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

It is not. The floor exerts a torque on the system (platform +


person), thus angular momentum is not conserved here.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Rotational Kinetic Energy


•Moment of Inertia
•Torque (two methods)
•Conditions for Equilibrium
•Newton’s 2nd Law in Rotational Form
•Angular Momentum
•Conservation of Angular Momentum

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 9: Fluids
•Introduction to Fluids
•Pressure
•Pascal’s Principle
•Gravity and Fluid Pressure
•Measurement of Pressure
•Archimedes’ Principle
•Continuity Equation
•Bernoulli’s Equation
•Viscosity and Viscous Drag
•Surface Tension
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.1 Fluids

A liquid will flow to take the shape of the container that holds
it. A gas will completely fill its container.

Fluids are easily deformable by external forces.

A liquid is incompressible. Its volume is fixed and is


impossible to change.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.2 Pressure

Pressure arises from the collisions between the particles of


a fluid with another object (container walls for example).

There is a momentum
change (impulse) that is
away from the container
walls. There must be a
force exerted on the
particle by the wall.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

By Newton’s 3rd Law, there is a force on the wall due to


the particle.

F
Pressure is defined as P  .
A

The units of pressure are N/m2 and are called Pascals (Pa).

Note: 1 atmosphere (atm) = 101.3 kPa

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.1): Someone steps on your toe,


exerting a force of 500 N on an area of 1.0 cm2. What is the
average pressure on that area in atmospheres?

2
 1m  2 4 2
1.0 cm    1.0 10 m
 100 cm 

F 500 N
Pav  
A 1.0 10 -4 m 2
6 2  1 Pa  1 atm 
 5.0 10 N/m  2  5 
 1 N/m  1.013 10 Pa 
 49 atm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.3 Pascal’s Principle

A change in pressure at any point in a confined fluid is


transmitted everywhere throughout the fluid. (This is useful
in making a hydraulic lift.)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The applied force is


transmitted to the piston
of cross-sectional area Apply a force F1 here
A2 here. to a piston of cross-
sectional area A1.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Mathematically,

P at point 1  P at point 2
F1 F
 2
A1 A 2
 A2 
F2    F1
 A1 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Assume that a force of 500 N (about 110 lbs) is


applied to the smaller piston in the previous figure. For each
case, compute the force on the larger piston if the ratio of the
piston areas (A2/A1) are 1, 10, and 100.

Using Pascal’s Principle:

A2 A1 F2

1 500 N
10 5000 N
100 50,000 N

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The work done pressing the smaller piston (#1) equals the
work done by the larger piston (#2).

F1d1  F2 d 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: In the previous example, for the case A2/A1 = 10,


it was found that F2/F1 = 10. If the larger piston needs to
rise by 1 m, how far must the smaller piston be depressed?

Using the result on the previous slide,

F2
d1  d 2  10 m
F1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.4 Gravity’s Effect on Fluid


Pressure

FBD for the fluid cylinder

P1A
A cylinder
of fluid

w
P2A

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Apply Newton’s 2nd Law


to the fluid cylinder:
F  P A PA w  0
2 1

P2 A  P1 A  Ad g  0
P2  P1  gd  0
 P2  P1  gd
or P2  P1  gd

If P1 (the pressure at the top of the cylinder) is known, then


the above expression can be used to find the variation of
pressure with depth in a fluid.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the top of the fluid column is placed at the surface of the


fluid, then P1=Patm if the container is open.

P  Patm  gd

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.15): At the surface of a freshwater


lake, the pressure is 105 kPa. (a) What is the pressure
increase in going 35.0 m below the surface?

P  Patm  gd
P  P  Patm  gd
 1000 kg/m 9.8 m/s 35 m 
3 2

 343 kPa  3.4 atm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: The surface pressure on the planet Venus is 95


atm. How far below the surface of the ocean on Earth do
you need to be to experience the same pressure? The
density of seawater is 1025 kg/m3.

P  Patm  gd
95 atm  1 atm  gd
gd  94 atm  9.5 106 N/m 2
1025 kg/m 9.8 m/s d  9.5 10
3 2 6
N/m 2
d  950 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.5 Measuring Pressure

A manometer
is a U-shaped Both ends of the
tube that is tube are open to
partially filled the atmosphere.
with liquid.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A container of gas is connected to one end of the U-tube

If there is a pressure difference between the gas and the


atmosphere, a force will be exerted on the fluid in the U-tube.
This changes the equilibrium position of the fluid in the tube.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

From the figure: At point C Pc  Patm

Also PB  PB'

The pressure at point B is the pressure of the gas.

PB  PB '  PC  gd
PB  PC  PB  Patm  gd
Pgauge  gd
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A Barometer

The atmosphere pushes on the container of mercury which


forces mercury up the closed, inverted tube. The distance
d is called the barometric pressure.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

From the figure PA  PB  Patm


and PA  gd

Atmospheric pressure is equivalent to a column of mercury


76.0 cm tall.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.22): An IV is connected to a


patient’s vein. The blood pressure in the vein has a gauge
pressure of 12 mm of mercury. At least how far above the
vein must the IV bag be placed in order for fluid to flow into
the vein? Assume that the density of the IV fluid is the same
as blood.

Blood: Pgauge   Hg gh1 The pressure is equivalent


to raising a column of
h1  12 mm mercury 12 mm tall.

IV: Pgauge   blood gh2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

At a minimum, the gauge pressures must be equal. When


h2 is large enough, fluid will flow from high pressure to low
pressure.

Pgauge   Hg gh1   blood gh2


 Hg gh1
h2 
 blood g
  Hg   13,600 kg/m 3 
  h1   3 
12 mm 
  blood   1060 kg/m 
 154 mm
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.6 Archimedes’ Principle


F1

An FBD for an object


floating submerged in
a fluid.

w
F2
The total force on the block due to the fluid is called the
buoyant force.
FB  F2  F1
where F2  F1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnitude of the buoyant force is:

FB  F2  F1
 P2 A  P1 A
 P2  P1 A

From before: P2  P1  gd

The result is FB  gdA  gV

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Archimedes’ Principle: A fluid exerts an upward buoyant


force on a submerged object equal in magnitude to the
weight of the volume of fluid displaced by the object.

FB  gV

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.30): A flat-bottomed barge loaded


with coal has a mass of 3.0105 kg. The barge is 20.0 m long
and 10.0 m wide. It floats in fresh water. What is the depth of
the barge below the waterline?
FB
F  F B w0 FBD
for the
FB  w
barge
mw g   wVw g  mb g
w
 wVw  mb
 w  Ad   mb
mb 3.0 105 kg
d   1 .5 m

 w A 1000 kg/m 20.0 m *10.0 m 
3

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.34): A piece of metal is released


under water. The volume of the metal is 50.0 cm3 and its
specific gravity is 5.0. What is its initial acceleration? (Note:
when v=0, there is no drag force.)

FB F  F B  w  ma
FBD
for the The buoyant force is the
metal weight of the fluid displaced
w by the object
FB   waterVg

FB ρ waterVg  ρ waterV 
Solve for a: a  g   g  g  1
m ρ objectVobject ρ V 
 object object  Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Since the object is completely submerged V=Vobject.



specific gravity 
 water
where water = 1000 kg/m3 is the
density of water at 4 °C.

 object
Given specific gravity   5.0
 water

 ρ waterV   1   1 
ag  
1  g  1  g   1  7.8 m/s 2
ρ V   S .G.   5.0 
 object object 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.7 Fluid Flow

A moving fluid will exert forces parallel to the surface over


which it moves, unlike a static fluid. This gives rise to a
viscous force that impedes the forward motion of the fluid.

A steady flow is one where the velocity at a given point in


a fluid is constant.

V1 = V2 =
constant constant
v1v2 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Steady flow is laminar; the fluid flows in layers. The path


that the fluid in these layers takes is called a streamline.
Streamlines do not cross.

An ideal fluid is incompressible, undergoes laminar flow,


and has no viscosity.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The continuity equation—Conservation of mass.

The amount of mass that flows though the cross-sectional


area A1 is the same as the mass that flows through cross-
sectional area A2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

m is the mass flow rate (units kg/s)


 Av
t

V
 Av is the volume flow rate (units m3/s)
t

The continuity equation is 1 A1v1   2 A2 v2

If the fluid is incompressible, then 1= 2.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.41): A garden hose of inner radius


1.0 cm carries water at 2.0 m/s. The nozzle at the end has
radius 0.2 cm. How fast does the water move through the
constriction?

A1v1  A2 v2
 A1   r12 
v2   v1   2 v1
 A2   r2 
2
 1.0 cm 
  2.0 m/s   50 m/s
 0.2 cm 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.8 Bernoulli’s Equation

Bernoulli’s equation is a statement of energy conservation.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

1 2 1 2
P1  gy1  v1  P2  gy2  v2
2 2
Work per Potential
unit volume energy Kinetic
done by the per unit energy Points 1 and 2
fluid volume per unit must be on the
volume same streamline
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.50): A nozzle is connected to a


horizontal hose. The nozzle shoots out water moving at 25.0
m/s. What is the gauge pressure of the water in the hose?
Neglect viscosity and assume that the diameter of the nozzle
is much smaller than the inner diameter of the hose.

Let point 1 be inside the hose and point 2 be outside


the nozzle.

1 2 1 2
P1  gy1  v1  P2  gy2  v2
2 2
The hose is horizontal
so y1=y2. Also P2 =Patm.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

1 2 1 2
Substituting: P1  v1  Patm  v2
2 2
1 2 1 2
P1  Patm  v2  v1
2 2
v2 = 25m/s and v1 is unknown. Use the continuity equation.

  d2 2 
   2
 A2    2   d2 
v1   v2   v    v2
2  2
 A1     d1    d1 
 2 
   

Since d2<<d1 it is true that v1<<v2.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

1 2 1 2
P1  Patm  v2  v1
2 2
1 1 2
2
2
2

  v2  v1  v2
2
1
 
 1000 kg/m 3 25.0 m/s 
2
2

 3.1 105 Pa

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.9 Viscosity

A real fluid has viscosity (fluid friction). This implies a


pressure difference needs to be maintained across the ends
of a pipe for fluid to flow.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Viscosity also causes the existence of a velocity gradient


across a pipe. A fluid flows more rapidly in the center of
the pipe and more slowly closer to the walls of the pipe.

The volume flow rate for laminar flow of a viscous fluid is


given by Poiseuille’s Law.

V  P L 4
 r
t 8 

where  is the viscosity

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.55): A hypodermic syringe attached


to a needle has an internal radius of 0.300 mm and a length
of 3.00 cm. The needle is filled with a solution of viscosity
2.0010-3 Pa sec; it is injected into a vein at a gauge
pressure of 16.0 mm Hg.

(a) What must the pressure of the fluid in the syringe be


in order to inject the solution at a rate of 0.150 mL/sec?

Solve Poiseuille’s Law for the pressure difference:

P  4 

8L V 8 2.00 10 2 Pa sec 3.00 cm  
 0.15 cm 3

r t 
 0.3 10 cm1 4
  s
 2830 Pa Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

This pressure difference is between the fluid in the


syringe and the fluid in the vein; it is the given gauge
pressure.

P  Ps  Pv
Ps  Pv  P
 2130 Pa  2830 Pa  4960 Pa

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What force must be applied to the plunger, which


has an area of 1.00 cm2?

The result of (a) gives the force per unit area on the
plunger so the force is just F = PA = 0.496 N.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


44
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.10 Viscous Drag

The viscous drag force on a sphere is given by Stokes’ law.

FD  6rv

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


45
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.64): A sphere of radius 1.0 cm is


dropped into a glass cylinder filled with a viscous liquid.
The mass of the sphere is 12.0 g and the density of the
liquid is 1200 kg/m3. The sphere reaches a terminal speed
of 0.15 m/s. What is the viscosity of the liquid?
y

FBD for FB FD
sphere Apply Newton’s Second Law
x
to the sphere

w F  F D  FB  w  ma

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


46
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

When v = vterminal, a = 0 and

FD  FB  w  0
6rvt  ml g  ms g  0
6rvt   lVl g  ms g  0
6rvt   lVs g  ms g  0
Solving for  ms g   lVs g
  2.4 Pa sec
6rvt

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


47
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§9.11 Surface Tension

The surface of a fluid acts like a a stretched membrane


(imagine standing on a trampoline). There is a force
along the surface of the fluid.

The surface tension is a force per unit length.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


48
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 9.70): Assume a water strider has a


roughly circular foot of radius 0.02 mm. The water strider has
6 legs.

(a) What is the maximum possible upward force on the


foot due to the surface tension of the water?

The water strider will be able to walk on water if


the net upward force exerted by the water equals
the weight of the insect. The upward force is
supplied by the water’s surface tension.

 2  2 6
F  PA   r  9 10 N
 r 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


49
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the maximum mass of this water strider so


that it can keep from breaking through the water
surface?

To be in equilibrium, each leg must support one-


sixth the weight of the insect.

1 6F
F w or m   5 10 6 kg
6 g

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


50
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Pressure and its Variation with Depth


•Pascal’s Principle
•Archimedes Principle
•Continuity Equation (conservation of mass)
•Bernoulli’s Equation (conservation of energy)
•Viscosity and Viscous Drag
•Surface Tension

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


51
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 10: Elasticity and


Oscillations

•Elastic Deformations
•Hooke’s Law
•Stress and Strain
•Shear Deformations
•Volume Deformations
•Simple Harmonic Motion
•The Pendulum
•Damped Oscillations, Forced Oscillations, and Resonance

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.1 Elastic Deformation of Solids

A deformation is the change in size or shape of an object.

An elastic object is one that returns to its original size and


shape after contact forces have been removed. If the forces
acting on the object are too large, the object can be
permanently distorted.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.2 Hooke’s Law

F F

Apply a force to both ends of a long wire. These forces will


stretch the wire from length L to L+L.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Define:

L The fractional
strain  change in length
L

F Force per unit cross-


stress  sectional area
A

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Hooke’s Law (Fx) can be written in terms of stress and


strain (stress  strain).

F L
Y
A L

YA
The spring constant k is now k 
L

Y is called Young’s modulus and is a measure of an


object’s stiffness. Hooke’s Law holds for an object
to a point called the proportional limit.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.1): A steel beam is placed


vertically in the basement of a building to keep the floor
above from sagging. The load on the beam is 5.8104 N and
the length of the beam is 2.5 m, and the cross-sectional area
of the beam is 7.510-3 m2. Find the vertical compression of
the beam.
F L
Force of Y
ceiling
A L
on beam  F  L 
L    
 A  Y 

Force of
floor on
For steel Y=200109 Pa.
beam

4
 F  L   5.8 10 N  2.5 m  4
L       3

2  9 2   1 . 0  10 m
 A  Y   7.5 10 m  200  10 Copyright
N/m© 2008– The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.6): A 0.50 m long guitar string, of


cross- sectional area 1.010-6 m2, has a Young’s modulus of
2.0109 Pa. By how much must you stretch a guitar string to
obtain a tension of 20.0 N?

F L
Y
A L
 F  L   20.0 N  0 .5 m 
L       6 2  9 2 
 A  Y   1.0  10 m  2.0  10 N/m 
 5.0 10 3 m  5.0 mm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.3 Beyond Hooke’s Law

If the stress on an object exceeds the elastic limit, then the


object will not return to its original length.

An object will fracture if the stress exceeds the breaking


point. The ratio of maximum load to the original cross-
sectional area is called tensile strength.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The ultimate strength of a material is the maximum stress


that it can withstand before breaking.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.10): An acrobat of mass 55 kg is


going to hang by her teeth from a steel wire and she does
not want the wire to stretch beyond its elastic limit. The
elastic limit for the wire is 2.5108 Pa. What is the minimum
diameter the wire should have to support her?
F
Want stress   elastic limit
A
F mg
A 
elastic limit elastic limit
2
D mg
  
2 elastic limit
4mg
D  1.7 10 3 m  1.7 mm
  elastic limit Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.4 Shear and Volume


Deformations

A shear deformation
occurs when two forces
are applied on opposite
surfaces of an object.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Shear Force F
Shear Stress  
Surface Area A
Define:
displacement of surfaces x
Shear Strain  
separation of surfaces L

Hooke’s law (stressstrain) for shear deformations is

F x where S is the
S
A L shear modulus

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.25): The upper surface of a cube of


gelatin, 5.0 cm on a side, is displaced by 0.64 cm by a
tangential force. If the shear modulus of the gelatin is 940
Pa, what is the magnitude of the tangential force?

F
F x
S
A L
F

From Hooke’s Law:


x
F  SA
L
 0.64 cm 

 940 N/m 0.0025 m  2
 2
  0.30 N 
 5.0 cm 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An object completely submerged in a fluid will be squeezed


on all sides.

F
volume stress  pressure 
A

V
The result is a volume strain; volume strain 
V

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a volume deformation, Hooke’s Law is (stressstrain):

V
P   B
V
where B is called the bulk modulus. The bulk modulus is a
measure of how easy a material is to compress.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.24): An anchor, made of cast iron


of bulk modulus 60.0109 Pa and a volume of 0.230 m3, is
lowered over the side of a ship to the bottom of the harbor
where the pressure is greater than sea level pressure by
1.75106 Pa. Find the change in the volume of the anchor.

V
P   B
V

V  
VP

 
0.23 m 3 1.75  106 Pa 
B 60.0 109 Pa
 6.7  10 6 m 3

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Deformations summary table

Tensile or
compressive Shear Volume

Stress Force per unit Shear force divided Pressure


cross-sectional by the area of the
area surface on which it
acts
Strain Fractional Ratio of the relative Fractional
change in displacement to the change in
length separation of the two volume
parallel surfaces
Constant of Young’s Shear modulus (S) Bulk
proportionality modulus (Y) Modulus (B)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.5 Simple Harmonic Motion

Simple harmonic motion (SHM)


occurs when the restoring force
(the force directed toward a stable
equilibrium point) is proportional to
the displacement from equilibrium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The motion of a mass on a spring is an example of SHM.

Equilibrium
position y

x
x

The restoring force is F=-kx.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Assuming the table is frictionless:

F x
  kx  ma x
k
a x t    xt 
m

1 2 1 2
Also, E t   K t   U t   mvt   kxt 
2 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

At the equilibrium point x=0 so a=0 too.


When the stretch is a maximum, a will be a maximum too.

The velocity at the end points will be zero, and it is a


maximum at the equilibrium point.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.6-7 Representing Simple


Harmonic Motion

When a mass-spring system is oriented vertically, it will


exhibit SHM with the same period and frequency as a
horizontally placed system.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

SHM
graphically

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A simple harmonic oscillator can be described mathematically


by:

xt   A cos t
x
vt     A sin t
t
v
a t     A 2 cos t where A is the amplitude
t of the motion, the
Or by: maximum displacement
from equilibrium, A=vmax,
xt   A sin t and A2 =amax.
x
vt    A cos t
t
v
a t     A 2 sin t
t
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

2
The period of oscillation is T  .

where  is the angular frequency of the k


oscillations, k is the spring constant and 
m
m is the mass of the block.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.28): The period of oscillation of an


object in an ideal mass-spring system is 0.50 sec and the
amplitude is 5.0 cm. What is the speed at the equilibrium
point?

At equilibrium x=0:

1 2 1 2 1 2
E  K  U  mv  kx  mv
2 2 2

Since E=constant, at equilibrium (x = 0) the


KE must be a maximum. Here v = vmax = A.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The amplitude A is given, but  is not.

2 2
   12.6 rads/sec
T 0.50 s

and v  Aω  5.0 cm 12.6 rads/sec  62.8 cm/sec

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.41): The diaphragm of a speaker


has a mass of 50.0 g and responds to a signal of 2.0 kHz by
moving back and forth with an amplitude of 1.810-4 m at that
frequency.

(a) What is the maximum force acting on the diaphragm?

 F  Fmax  ma max  m A  mA2f   4 2


mAf 2
 2
 2

The value is Fmax=1400 N.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the mechanical energy of the diaphragm?

Since mechanical energy is conserved, E = KEmax = Umax.

1 2
U max  kA The value of k is unknown so use KEmax.
2
1 2
KEmax  mvmax 1 2 1 2 1 2
2 KEmax  mvmax  m A   mA2 2f 
2 2 2

The value is KEmax= 0.13 J.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.47): The displacement of an object


in SHM is given by:
y t   8.00 cm sin1.57 rads/sect 

What is the frequency of the oscillations?

Comparing to y(t)= A sint gives A = 8.00 cm and


 = 1.57 rads/sec. The frequency is:

 1.57 rads/sec
f    0.250 Hz
2 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Other quantities can also be determined:

2 2
The period of the motion is T   4.00 sec
 1.57 rads/sec

xmax  A  8.00 cm
vmax  A  8.00 cm 1.57 rads/sec  12.6 cm/sec
2
amax  A 2  8.00 cm 1.57 rads/sec  19.7 cm/sec 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.8 The Pendulum

A simple pendulum is constructed by attaching a mass to


a thin rod or a light string. We will also assume that the
amplitude of the oscillations is small.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A simple pendulum:

 An FBD for the


pendulum bob:
L y

m

Assume <<1 radian
x
w

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

F x   mg sin   mat
Apply Newton’s 2nd
Law to the pendulum v2
bob.  Fy  T  mg cos  m r

If we assume that <<1 rad, then sin   and cos 1 then
the angular frequency of oscillations is found to be:

g

L

L
The period of oscillations is T  2
g
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.60): A clock has a pendulum that


performs one full swing every 1.0 sec. The object at the end
of the string weighs 10.0 N. What is the length of the
pendulum?

L
T  2
g

Solving for L: L 
gT 2

9.8 m/s 2 1.0 s 
 0.25 m
  2

2 2
4 4

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 10.84): The gravitational potential


energy of a pendulum is U=mgy. Taking y=0 at the lowest
point of the swing, show that y=L(1-cos).


Lcos
L L

y  L(1  cos  )
y=0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A physical pendulum is any rigid object that is free to


oscillate about some fixed axis. The period of oscillation of
a physical pendulum is not necessarily the same as that of
a simple pendulum.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.9 Damped Oscillations

When dissipative forces such as friction are not negligible,


the amplitude of oscillations will decrease with time. The
oscillations are damped.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Graphical representations of damped oscillations:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§10.10 Forced Oscillations and


Resonance

A force can be applied periodically to a damped oscillator (a


forced oscillation).

When the force is applied at the natural frequency of the


system, the amplitude of the oscillations will be a maximum.
This condition is called resonance.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Stress and Strain


•Hooke’s Law
•Simple Harmonic Motion
•SHM Examples: Mass-Spring System, Simple Pendulum
and Physical Pendulum
•Energy Conservation Applied to SHM

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 11: Waves

•Energy Transport by Waves


•Longitudinal and Transverse Waves
•Transverse Waves on Strings
•Periodic Waves
•Mathematical and Graphical Descriptions of Waves
•Reflection and Refraction of Waves
•Interference and Diffraction
•Standing Waves on a String

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.1 Waves and Energy Transport

A wave is a disturbance that travels outward from its source.

Waves carry energy. The energy is transported outward from


the source; matter is not.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When a stone is dropped into a pond, the water is


disturbed from its equilibrium positions as the wave
passes; it returns to its equilibrium position after the wave
has passed.

The water moves


up and down as the
disturbance moves
outward.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Intensity is a measure of the amount of energy/sec that


passes through a square meter of area perpendicular to the
wave’s direction of travel.

Power P Intensity has units


I 
4r 2
4r 2 of watts/m2 .

This is an inverse square law. The intensity drops as the


inverse square of the distance from the source. (Light
sources appear dimmer the farther away from them you are.)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: At the location of the Earth’s upper atmosphere,


the intensity of the Sun’s light is 1400 W/m2. What is the
intensity of the Sun’s light at the orbit of the planet Mercury?

Psun Psun
Ie  Im 
4res2 2
4rms

Divide one equation by the other:


Psun
2 2
2 11
I m 4rms  r   1.50  10 m 
   es    10
  6.57
Ie Psun  rms   5.85  10 m 
4res2
 I m  6.57 I e  9200 W/m 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.2 Transverse and Longitudinal


Waves

A transverse wave is where the motions of the particles are


transverse (perpendicular) to the direction of wave travel.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A longitudinal wave is where the motions of the particles are


along the same direction as the wave propagation.

Compression, a Rarefaction, a region


region of high density of low density
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Both types of waves can move through solids. Only


longitudinal waves can move through a fluid. A transverse
wave can move along the surface of a fluid.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.3 Transverse Waves on a


String

Attach a mass to a string to provide tension. The string is


then shaken at one end at a frequency f.

Attach a
vibrator
here

M
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

F
A wave traveling on this string will have a speed of v 

where F is the force applied to the string (tension) and 


is the mass/unit length of the string (linear mass density).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 11.10): When the tension in a cord is


75.0 N, the wave speed is 140 m/s. What is the linear mass
density of the cord?

F
The speed of a wave on a string is v

Solving for the linear mass density:

F 75.0 N 3
 2  2
 3 . 8  10 kg/m
v 140 m/s 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.4 Periodic Waves

A periodic wave repeats the same pattern over and over.

For periodic waves: v=f


v is the wave’s speed
f is the wave’s frequency
 Is the wave’s wavelength

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The period T is measured by the amount of time it takes for


a point on the wave to go through one complete cycle of
oscillations. The frequency is then f = 1/T.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

One way to determine the wavelength is by measuring the


distance between two consecutive crests.

The maximum
displacement
from equilibrium
is amplitude (A)
of a wave.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 11.13): What is the wavelength of


a wave whose speed and period are 75.0 m/s and 5.00
ms, respectively?


v  f 
T

Solving for the wavelength:

  vT  75.0 m/s 5.00  10 3 s   0.375 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.5 Mathematical Description of


a Wave

To describe a wave, we must know the position of the


particles in the medium. This requires a function of the form
y(x,t).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

y ( x, t )  A cost  kx 

+ is used for a wave traveling in the


–x direction, and – is used for a
wave traveling in the +x direction.

2
k is called the wave number.

t  kx  is called the phase.

Note: it would also be valid to use the sine function in the


above description. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The above picture is a snapshot (time is frozen). Two points


on the wave are “in phase” if:

kx2  kx1  n (n= 1, 2, 3,…)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 11.22): A wave on a string has an


equation:

y ( x, t )  4.00 mm sin 600 rad/sect  6.00 rad/m x 

(a) What is the amplitude of the wave?

A = 4.00 mm

(b) What is the wavelength?

The wave number k is 6.00 rad/m.


2 2
   1.05 m
k 6.00 rad/m
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) What is the period?

22
T   1.05  10  2 sec
 600 rad/sec

(d) What is the wave speed?

    600 rad/sec
v  f   2f     100 m/s
 2  k 6.00 rad/m

(e) What direction is the wave traveling.

Along the +x direction. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.6 Graphing Waves

The next two slides show three “snapshots” of a traveling


wave y(x,t) = A cos (t  kx) where A = 1.0 m, k = 1 rad/m,
and  =  rad/sec.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Wave travels
to the left
(-x-direction) time

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Wave travels
to the right
(+x-direction)
time

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.7 The Principle of


Superposition

For small amplitudes, waves will pass through each other


and emerge unchanged.

Superposition Principle: When two or more waves overlap,


the net disturbance at any point is the sum of the individual
disturbances due to each wave.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Two traveling wave


pulses: left pulse
travels right; right
pulse travels left.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.8 Reflection and Refraction

At an abrupt boundary between two media, a reflection will


occur. A portion of the incident wave will be reflected
backward from the boundary.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When you have a wave that travels


from a “low density” medium to a
“high density” medium, the
reflected wave pulse will be
inverted.

The frequency of the reflected


wave remains the same.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When a wave is incident on


the boundary between two
different media, a portion of
the wave is reflected, and a
portion will be transmitted
into the second medium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The frequency of the transmitted wave also remains the


same. However, both the wave’s speed and wavelength
are changed such that:

v1 v2
f  
1 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The transmitted wave will also suffer a change in


propagation direction (refraction) determined by

sin 1 v1

sin  2 v2

where 1 is the angle of incidence, 2 is the angle of


refraction, and v1 and v2 represent the wave speeds in
medium 1 and medium 2 respectively. The angles are
measured from the normal.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 11.36): Light of wavelength 0.500 m


in air enters the water in a swimming pool. The speed of
light in water is 0.750 times the speed in air. What is the
wavelength of the light in water?

Since the frequency is unchanged in both media:


vair vwater
f  
air water
 vwater 
water   air
 vair 
 0.750vair 
  0.500 m  0.375m
 vair 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.9 Interference and Diffraction

Two waves are considered coherent if they have the


same frequency and maintain a fixed phase relationship.

Two waves are considered incoherent if the phase


relationship between them varies randomly.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When waves are in phase, their superposition gives


constructive interference.

When waves are one-half a cycle out of phase, their


superposition gives destructive interference.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When two waves travel


different distances to reach
the same point, the phase
difference is determined by:

d1  d 2 phase difference

 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Diffraction is the spreading of a wave around an obstacle


in its path.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§11.10 Standing Waves

Pluck a stretched string such


that y(x,t) = A sin(t + kx)

When the wave strikes the wall, there will be a reflected


wave that travels back along the string.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The reflected wave will be 180° out of phase with the wave
incident on the wall. Its form is y(x,t) = -A sin (t - kx).

Apply the superposition principle to the two waves on the


string:

y ( x, t )  y1 ( x, t )  y2 ( x, t )
 Asin t  kx   sin t  kx 
 2 A cos t sin kx

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The previous expression is the mathematical form of a


standing wave.

A A
A

N N

N N

A node (N) is a point of zero oscillation. An antinode (A) is


a point of maximum displacement. All points between nodes
oscillate up and down.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The nodes occur where y(x,t) = 0.

y  x, t   2 A cos t sin kx  0

The nodes are found from the locations where sin kx=0,
which happens when kx = 0, , 2,…. That is when kx = n
where n = 0,1,2,…

The antinodes occur when sin kx= 1; that is where

 3
kx  , ,
2 2
kx 
2n  1
and n  0 ,1, 2 ,
2 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the string has a length L, and both ends are fixed, then
y(x=0,t) = 0 and y(x=L, t) = 0.

y  x  0, t   sin k 0   0
y  x  L, t   sin kL  0

kL  n
2
L  n

The wavelength of 2L
a standing wave:
 where n = 1, 2, 3,…
n

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

2L These are the permitted wavelengths of standing


n 
n waves on a string; no others are allowed.

The speed of the wave is: v  n f n

v nv
The allowed frequencies are then: f n   n =1, 2, 3,…
n 2L

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The n=1 frequency is called the fundamental frequency.

v
nv  v 
fn    n   nf1
n 2 L  2L 

All allowed frequencies (called harmonics) are integer


multiples of f1.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 11.55): A Guitar’s E-string has a length


65 cm and is stretched to a tension of 82 N. It vibrates with a
fundamental frequency of 329.63 Hz. Determine the mass
per unit length of the string.

F
For a wave on a string: v

Solving for the linear mass density:

F F F
 2   2
v 1 f1  f1 2 L 2
2


82 N 
 4.5  10  4 kg/m
329.63 Hz 2 2 * 0.65 m 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Intensity
•Wave Properties (f, , v, ampltude)
•Transverse vs. Longitudinal Waves
•Mathematical Description of a Wave
•Reflection, Refraction, Interference, and Diffraction
•Superposition of Waves
•Standing Waves on a String

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


44
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 12: Sound

•Sound Waves
•The Speed of Sound
•Amplitude & Intensity of Sound Waves
•Standing Sound Waves
•Beats
•The Doppler Effect
•Shock Waves
•Echolocation

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.1 Sound Waves

Sound waves are longitudinal. They can be represented


by either variations in pressure (gauge pressure) or by
displacements of an air element.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The middle of a
compression (rarefaction)
corresponds to a pressure
maximum (minimum).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.2 The Speed of Sound Waves

The speed of sound in different materials can be determined


as follows:
B B is the bulk modulus of the
In fluids v
 fluid and  its density.

Y Y is the Young’s modulus of


In thin solid rods v 
 the solid and  its density.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

T
In ideal gases v  v0
T0

Here v0 is the speed at a temperature T0 (in kelvin) and v


is the speed at some other temperature T (also in kelvin).

For air, a useful approximation to the above expression is

v  331  0.606TC  m/s


where Tc is the air temperature in C.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Materials that have a high restoring force (stiffer) will have a


higher sound speed.

Materials that are denser (more inertia) will have a lower


sound speed.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.8): A copper alloy has a Young’s


Modulus of 1.11011 Pa and a density of 8.92 103 kg/m3.
What is the speed of sound in a thin rod made of this alloy?

Y 1.11011 Pa
v  3 3
 3500 m/s
 8.9 10 kg/m

The speed of sound in this alloy is slightly less than the


value quoted for copper (3560 m/s) in table 12.1.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.1): Bats emit ultrasonic sound


waves with a frequency as high as 1.0105 Hz. What is the
wavelength of such a wave in air of temperature 15.0 C?

The speed of sound in


v  331  0.606TC  m/s air of this temperature
is 340 m/s.

v 340 m/s 3
  5
 3 . 4  10 m
f 1.0 10 Hz

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.10): A lightning flash is seen in the


sky and 8.2 seconds later the boom of thunder is heard.
The temperature of the air is 12.0 C.

(a) What is the speed of sound in air at that temperature?

The speed of sound in


v  331  0.606TC  m/s air of this temperature
is 338 m/s.

(b) How far away is the lightning strike?

d  vt  338 m/s 8.2 s   2800 m  2.8 km


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The speed of light is 3.00105 km/s. How long does it


take the light signal to reach the observer?

d 2.8 km -6
t  5
 9. 3  10 sec
v 3.0 10 km/s

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.3 Amplitude & Intensity of


Sound Waves

For sound waves:

2
Ip 0 p0 is the pressure amplitude and
I  s02 s0 is the displacement amplitude.

The intensity of sound waves also follow an inverse


square law.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Loudness of a sound is measured by the logarithm of the


intensity.

The threshold of hearing is at an intensity of 10-12 W/m2.

I
Sound intensity level is defined by   10dB log
I0

dB are decibels

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.12): The sound level 25 m from a


loudspeaker is 71 dB. What is the rate at which sound
energy is being produced by the loudspeaker, assuming it to
be an isotropic source?
I
Given:   10dB log  71 dB
I0

Solve for I, the intensity of a sound wave:


I
log  7.1
I0
I
 10 7.1
I0
  
I  I 010 7.1  10 12 W/m 2 107.1  1.3 10 5 W/m 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The intensity of an isotropic source is defined by:

P
I
4r 2
P  I 4r 2
2
 (1.3  10 W/m )4 25 m 
5 2

 0.10 Watts

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Two sounds have levels of 80 dB and 90 dB.


What is the difference in the sound intensities?

I I
1  10dB log  80 dB  2  10dB log  90 dB
I0 I0

 I2 I1 
Subtracting:  2  1  10 dB  10 dB log  log 
 I0 I0 
 I2 
10 dB  10 dB log 
 I1 
I2
 101
I1
I 2  10 I1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.4 Standing Sound Waves

Consider a pipe open at both ends:

The ends of the pipe are open to the atmosphere. The


open ends must be pressure nodes (and displacement
antinodes).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The distance between two adjacent antinodes is ½. Each


pair of antinodes must have a node in between.

The fundamental mode (it has the fewest number of


antinodes) will have a wavelength of 2L.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The next standing wave pattern to satisfy the conditions at


the ends of the pipe will have one more node and one more
antinode than the previous standing wave. Its wavelength
will be L.

The general result for standing waves in a tube open at


both ends is

2L
n  where n=1, 2, 3,…
n

nv v
fn    nf1 f1 is the fundamental frequency.
n 2 L
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Now consider a pipe open at one end and closed at the


other.

As before, the end of the pipe open to the atmosphere


must be a pressure node (and a displacement
antinode).
The closed end of the pipe must be a displacement
node (and a pressure antinode).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

One end of the pipe is a pressure node, the other a


pressure antinode. The distance between a consecutive
node and antinode is one-quarter of a wavelength.

Here, the fundamental mode will have a wavelength of 4L.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The next standing wave to satisfy the conditions at the ends


of the pipe will have one more node and one more antinode
than the previous standing wave. Its wavelength will be
(4/3)L.

The general result for standing waves in a tube open at


one end and closed at the other is

4L
n  where n=1, 3, 5,…. n (odd values only!!)
n

nv v
fn    nf1 f1 is the fundamental frequency.
n 4 L
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.22): An organ pipe that is open at


both ends has a fundamental frequency of 382 Hz at
0.0 °C. What is the fundamental frequency for this pipe at
20.0 °C?

At Tc = 0.0 °C, the speed of sound is 331 m/s.


At Tc = 20.0 °C, the speed of sound is 343 m/s.

v v
The fundamental frequency is f1  
1 2 L

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The ratio of the fundamental frequencies at the two


temperatures is:

v20
f1, 20 2 L v20
   1.04
f1, 0 v0 v0
2L
f1, 20  1.04 f1, 0  396 Hz

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

How long is this organ pipe?

v
f1 
Using either 2L
set of v and f1. v
L  0.43 m
2 f1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.5 Beats

When two waves with nearly the same frequency are


superimposed, the result is a pulsation called beats.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Two waves of
different
frequency

Superposition
of the above
waves

The beat frequency is f  f1  f 2


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the beat frequency exceeds about 15 Hz, the ear will


perceive two different tones instead of beats.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.6 The Doppler Effect

When a moving object emits a sound, the wave crests


appear bunched up in front of the object and appear to be
more spread out behind the object. This change in wave
crest spacing is heard as a change in frequency.

The results will be similar when the observer is in motion


and the sound source is stationary and also when both the
sound source and observer are in motion.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The Doppler Effect formula

 vo  fo is the observed frequency.


1  fs is the frequency emitted by the source.
fo   v  fs
 1  vs  vo is the observer’s velocity.
  vs is the source’s velocity.
 v 
v is the speed of sound.

Note: take vs and vo to be positive when they move in the


direction of wave propagation and negative when they are
opposite to the direction of wave propagation.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.39): A source of sound waves of


frequency 1.0 kHz is stationary. An observer is traveling at
0.5 times the speed of sound.

(a) What is the observed frequency if the observer


moves toward the source?

fo is unknown; fs= 1.0 kHz; vo = -0.5v; vs = 0; and v is


the speed of sound.

 vo    0.5v 
1  1 
fo   v  fs   v  f  1.5 f  1.5 kHz
s
 1  vs   1 0 
   
 v   v 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Repeat, but with the observer moving in the other


direction.

fo is unknown; fs= 1.0 kHz; vo = +0.5v; vs =0; and v is


the speed of sound.

 vo    0.5v 
1  1 
fo   v  fs   v  f  0.5 f  0.5 kHz
s
 1  vs   1 0 
   
 v   v 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.7 Shock Waves

If a plane were traveling at the


speed of sound , what would
the wave crests looks like?

They would be bunched up in


front of the aircraft and an
observer (to the right) would
measure =0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the source moves with a speed greater than that


of sound, then the wave crests pile up on top of
each other forming a cone-shaped shock wave.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§12.8 Echolocation

Sound waves can be sent out from a transmitter of some


sort; they will reflect off any objects they encounter and can
be received back at their source. The time interval between
emission and reception can be used to build up a picture of
the scene.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.47): A boat is using sonar to


detect the bottom of a freshwater lake. If the echo from a
sonar signal is heard 0.540 s after it is emitted, how deep is
the lake? Assume the lake’s temperature is uniform and at
25 C.

The signal travels two times the depth of the lake so


the one-way travel time is 0.270 s. From table 12.1,
the speed of sound in freshwater is 1493 m/s.

depth  vt
 1493 m/s 0.270 s   403 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 12.49): A bat emits chirping sounds of


frequency 82.0 kHz while hunting for moths to eat. If the bat
is flying toward a moth at a speed of 4.40 m/s and the moth
is flying away from the bat at 1.20 m/s, what is the frequency
of the wave reflected from the moth as observed by the bat?
Assume T = 10.0 C.

The speed of sound in


v  331  0.606TC  m/s air of this temperature
is 337 m/s.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The flying bat emits sound of f =82.0 kHz that is


received by a moving moth. The frequency observed
by the moth is:

 vo    1.2 m/s 
1   1 
fo   v  fs   337 m/s 82.0 kHz   82.8 kHz
 1  vs   1   4.4 m/s 
   
 v   337 m/s 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Some of the sound received by the moth will be reflected


back toward the bat. The moth becomes the sound
source (f = 82.8 kHz) and the bat is now the observer.

 vo    4.4 m/s 
1  1 
fo   v  fs   337 m/s 82.8 kHz   83.6 kHz
 1  vs   1   1.2 m/s 
   
 v   337 m/s 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary
•Sound is a longitudinal wave.
•The speed of sound depends on material properties
such as “stiffness”, density, and temperature.
•Sound Intensity Level
•Standing Waves in Pipes (both ends open & one end
open/one end closed)
•The Doppler Effect
•Shock Waves
•Echolocation
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 13: Temperature and Ideal


Gas

•What is Temperature?
•Temperature Scales
•Thermal Expansion
•Molecular Picture of a Gas
•The Ideal Gas Law
•Kinetic Theory of Ideal Gases
•Chemical Reaction Rates
•Collisions Between Molecules

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.1 Temperature

Heat is the flow of energy due to a temperature difference.


Heat always flows from objects at high temperature to
objects at low temperature.

When two objects have the same temperature, they are in


thermal equilibrium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics:

If two objects are each in thermal equilibrium with a


third object, then the two objects are in thermal
equilibrium with each other.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.2 Temperature Scales

Absolute or Fahrenheit Celsius


Kelvin scale scale scale
Water boils* 373.15 K 212 F 100 C

Water freezes* 273.15 K 32 F 0 C

Absolute zero 0K -459.67 F -273.15C

(*) Values given at 1 atmosphere of pressure.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The temperature scales are related by:

Fahrenheit/
Celsius TF  1.8 F/C TC  32F

Absolute/
Celsius T  TC  273.15

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.3): (a) At what temperature (if


any) does the numerical value of Celsius degrees equal the
numerical value of Fahrenheit degrees?

TF  1.8TC  32  TC
TC  40 C

(b) At what temperature (if any) does the numerical value


of Kelvin equal the numerical value of Fahrenheit
degrees?
TF  1.8TC  32
 1.8T  273  32
 1.8TF  273  32
TF  574 F Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.3 Thermal Expansion of Solids


and Liquids

Most objects expand when their temperature increases.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An object’s length after its temperature has changed is

 is the coefficient of
L  1  T L0 thermal expansion

where T=T-T0 and L0 is the length of the object at a


temperature T0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.84): An iron bridge girder


(Y = 2.01011 N/m2) is constrained between two rock faces
whose spacing doesn’t change. At 20.0 C the girder is
relaxed. How large a stress develops in the iron if the sun
heats the girder to 40.0 C?

F L
Using Hooke’s Law: Y
A L
 Y T 
 
 2.0 1011 N/m 2 12  10 6 K -1 20 K  
 4.8  107 N/m 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

How does the area of an object change when its temperature


changes?

The blue square has an area of L02.

With a temperature change T each


L0
side of the square will have a length
L0+L change of L = TL0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The fractional change in area is:

new area  A  L0  TL0 L0  TL0 


 L20  2TL20   2 T 2 L20
 L20  2TL20
 A0 1  2T 
A
 2T
A0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The fractional change in volume due to a temperature


change is:

V
  T For solids =3
V0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.4 Molecular Picture of a Gas

The number density of particles is N/V where N is the total


number of particles contained in a volume V.

If a sample contains a single element, the number of


particles in the sample is N = M/m. N is the total mass of
the sample (M) divided by the mass per particle (m).
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

One mole of a substance contains the same number of


particles as there are atoms in 12 grams of 12C. The number
of atoms in 12 grams of 12C is Avogadro’s number.

N A  6.022 10 23 mol-1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A carbon-12 atom by definition has a mass of exactly 12


atomic mass units (12 u).

 12 g  1 mole  1 kg 
  23  
 12 mole  6.022  10  1000 g 
 1.66  10 - 27 kg

This is the conversion factor between the atomic mass unit


and kg (1 u = 1.6610-27 kg). NA and the mole are defined
so that a 1 gram sample of a substance with an atomic
mass of 1 u contains exactly NA particles.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.39): Air at room temperature and


atmospheric pressure has a mass density of 1.2 kg/m3. The
average molecular mass of air is 29.0 u. How many air
molecules are there in 1.0 cm3 of air?

total mass of air in 1.0 cm 3


number of particles 
average mass per air molecule

The total mass of air in the given volume is:

3 3
 1.2 kg  1.0 cm  1 m 
m  V   3 
  
 m  1  100 cm 
 1.2 10 6 kg
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

total mass of air in 1.0 cm 3


number of particles 
average mass per air molecule
1.2 10 6 kg


29.0 u/particle 1.66 1027 kg/u 
 2.5 1019 particles

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.5 Absolute Temperature and


the Ideal Gas Law

Experiments done on dilute gases (a gas where interactions


between molecules can be ignored) show that:

For constant pressure V T Charles’ Law

For constant volume P T Gay-Lussac’s Law

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For constant 1
temperature
P Boyle’s Law
V

For constant pressure Avogadro’s


and temperature
VN Law

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Putting all of these statements together gives the ideal gas


law (microscopic form):

k = 1.3810-23 J/K is
PV  NkT Boltzmann’s constant

The ideal gas law can also be written as (macroscopic


form):
R = NAk= 8.31 J/K/mole is the
PV  nRT universal gas constant and n is
the number of moles.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.41): A cylinder in a car engine


takes Vi = 4.5010-2 m3 of air into the chamber at 30 C and
at atmospheric pressure. The piston then compresses the
air to one-ninth of the original volume and to 20.0 times the
original pressure. What is the new temperature of the air?

Here, Vf = Vi/9, Pf = 20.0Pi, and Ti = 30 C = 303 K.

PiVi  NkTi The ideal gas law holds


for each set of parameters
(before compression and
Pf V f  NkT f after compression).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Pf V f NkT f Tf
Take the ratio:  
PiVi NkTi Ti

 Pf  V f 
The final temperature is T f    Ti
 Pi  Vi 
 Vi 
 20.0 Pi  9 
   303 K   673 K
 Pi  Vi 
 

The final temperature is 673 K = 400 C.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.6 Kinetic Theory of the Ideal


Gas

An ideal gas is a dilute gas where the particles act as point


particles with no interactions except for elastic collisions.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Gas particles have random motions. Each time a particle


collides with the walls of its container there is a force exerted
on the wall. The force per unit area on the wall is equal to
the pressure in the gas.

The pressure will depend on:


•The number of gas particles
•Frequency of collisions with the walls
•Amount of momentum transferred during each collision

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The pressure in the gas is


2N
P K tr
3V
Where <Ktr> is the average translational kinetic energy of
the gas particles; it depends on the temperature of the gas.

3
K tr  kT
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The average kinetic energy also depends on the rms speed


of the gas
1 2 1 2
K tr  m v  mvrms
2 2

where the rms speed is


3 1 2
K tr  kT  mvrms
2 2
3kT
vrms 
m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The distribution of speeds in a gas is given by the Maxwell-


Boltzmann Distribution.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.60): What is the temperature of


an ideal gas whose molecules have an average
translational kinetic energy of 3.2010-20 J?

3
K tr  kT
2
2 K tr
T  1550 K
3k

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.70): What are the rms speeds of


helium atoms, and nitrogen, hydrogen, and oxygen
molecules at 25 C?

3kT
vrms  On the Kelvin scale T = 25 C = 298 K.
m

Element Mass (kg) rms speed (m/s)


He 6.6410-27 1360
H2 3.32 10-27 1930
N2 4.64 10-26 515
O2 5.32 10-26 482

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.7 Temperature and Reaction


Rates

For a chemical reaction to proceed, the reactants must


have a minimum amount of kinetic energy called activation
energy (Ea).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

3
If Ea  kT
2

then only molecules in the high speed tail of Maxwell-


Boltzmann distribution can react. When this is the situation,
the reaction rates are an exponential function of T.

Ea
 
 kT 
reaction rates  e

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.76): The reaction rate for the


hydrolysis of benzoyl-l-arginine amide by trypsin at 10.0 C
is 1.878 times faster than at 5.0 C. Assuming that the
reaction rate is exponential, what is the activation energy?

Ea
 
 kT 1 
r1  e where T1 = 10.0 C = 283 K and T2
 
Ea  = 5 C = 278 K; and r1 = 2.878 r2.
 kT 2 
r2  e

r1  Ea Ea 
The ratio of the reaction rates is  exp   
r2  kT1 kT2 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Solving for the activation energy gives:

 r1 
k ln 
 r2 
Ea 
1 1
  
 T2 T1 



1.38  10  23

J/K ln1.878
 1.37  10 19 J
 1 1 
  
 278 K 283 K 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§13.8 Collisions Between Gas


Molecules

On average, a gas particle will be able to travel a distance

1

2d 2  N / V 

before colliding with another particle. This is the mean free


path. The quantity d2 is the cross-sectional area of the
particle.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

After a collision, the molecules involved will have their


direction of travel changed. Successive collisions
produce a random walk trajectory.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Substances will move from areas of high concentration to


areas of lower concentration. This process is called
diffusion.

In a time t, the rms displacement in one direction is:

D is the diffusion constant


xrms  2 Dt (see table 13.3).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 13.81): Estimate the time it takes a


sucrose molecule to move 5.00 mm in one direction by
diffusion in water. Assume there is no current in the water.

xrms  2 Dt

Solve for t t
x

2
5.00 10 m
rms  3
 25000 s
 2

10 2
2D 2 5.0 10 m /s  

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Definition of Temperature
•Temperature Scales (Celsius, Fahrenheit, Absolute)
•Thermal Expansion
•Origin of Pressure in a Gas
•Ideal Gas Law
•Exponential Reaction Rates
•Mean Free Path

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 14: Heat

•Internal Energy
•Heat
•Heat Capacity
•Specific Heat
•Phase Transitions
•Thermal Conduction
•Thermal Convection
•Thermal Radiation

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.1 Internal Energy

The internal energy of a system is the sum total of all the


energy of all the molecules in the system. It does not
include macroscopic kinetic energy nor energy due to
external interactions (potential energy).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Internal energy includes:

•Translational and rotational kinetic energy of the


particles due to their individual motions.
•Vibrational kinetic and potential energy
•Potential energy due to interactions between particles in
the system.
•Chemical and nuclear energy (binding energies)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Internal energy does not include:

•The kinetic energy of the molecules due to translations,


rotations, and vibrations of the whole or large fraction of
the system.
•Potential energy due to the interactions of the molecules
of the system with bodies outside of the system (external
interactions).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.5): A child of mass 15 kg climbs to


the top of a slide that is 1.7 m above a horizontal run that
extends for 0.5 m at the base of the slide. After sliding
down, the child comes to rest just before reaching the very
end of the horizontal portion of the slide. How much internal
energy was generated during this process?

U = mgh
KE = 0

1.7 m

U=0
KE = 0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The change in mechanical energy of the child is


E= Ef – Ei = -mgh = -250 J. This is the increase in
internal energy and is distributed between the child, the
slide, and the air.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.2 Heat

Heat is energy in transit between two systems at different


temperatures. Heat flows from the system at high
temperature to the system at low temperature.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An experiment by Joule showed that the quantity of work


done on a system or the same quantity of heat flowing into
a system causes the same increase in the system’s internal
energy.

Heat is measured in joules or calories. 1 cal = 4.186 J


(the mechanical equivalent of heat); 1 Calorie (used on
food packaging) = 1 kcal.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.3 Heat Capacity and Specific


Heat

For many substances, under normal circumstances TQ.


Or Q = CT where C is the heat capacity.

The specific heat capacity, or just specific heat, of a


substance is the heat capacity per unit mass.

C Q
c  or Q  mcT
m mT Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.12): If 125.6 kJ of heat are


supplied to 5.00102 g of water at 22 C, what is the final
temperature of the water?

Q  mcT  mcTf  Ti 
Q
Tf  Ti 
mc
125.6 kJ
 22C   82C
0.5 kg 4.186 kJ/kg C

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.19): A 0.400 kg aluminum


teakettle contains 2.00 kg of water at 15.0 C. How much
heat is required to raise the temperature of the water (and
kettle) to 100 C?

The heat needed to raise the temperature of the water to


Tf is

Qw  mw cw Tw  2 kg 4.186 kJ/kg C 85 C   712 kJ.

The heat needed to raise the temperature of the aluminum


to Tf is

QAl  mAlcAl TAl  0.4 kg 0.900 kJ/kg C 85 C   30.6 kJ.

Then Qtotal= Qw + QAl = 732 kJ.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.4 Specific Heat of Ideal Gases

The average kinetic energy of a molecule in an ideal gas is


3
K tr  kT .
2
And the total kinetic energy of the gas is

3 3
K tr  NkT  nRT .
2 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Define the molar specific heat at constant volume; this


is the heat capacity per mole.

Q
CV 
nT

Heat is allowed to flow into a gas, but the gas is not


allowed to expand. If the gas is ideal and monatomic, the
heat goes into increasing the average kinetic energy of
the particles.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

3
The added heat is K tr  Q  nRT .
2

3
nRT
Q 2 3
CV    R  12.5 J/K/mol
nT nT 2

5
If the gas is diatomic: CV  R  20.8 J/K/mol
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Internal energy will be distributed equally among all possible


degrees of freedom (equipartition of energy). Each degree
of freedom contributes ½kT of energy per molecule and ½R
to the molar specific heat at constant volume.

Rotational motions of a 2-atom molecule:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.28): A container of nitrogen gas


(N2) at 23 C contains 425 L at a pressure of 3.5 atm. If
26.6 kJ of heat are added to the container, what will be the
new temperature of the gas?

For a diatomic gas, Q  nCV T .

PiVi
The number of moles n is given by the ideal gas law n  .
RTi

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The change in temperature is

 Q  RTi 
T    
 CV  P iVi 
 26.6 103 J  R296 K 
  
 2 .5 R  3 .5 atm  1 . 013  105
N/m 2
/atm 425 L 10 3
m 3
/L  
 21 K

The final temperature of the gas is Tf = Ti + T = 317 K


= 44 C.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.5 Phase Transitions

A phase transition occurs whenever a substance changes


from one phase (solid, liquid, or gas) to another.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Latent heat is the amount of heat per unit mass required


to change the phase of a substance.

The latent heat of fusion (Lf) is the heat per unit


mass needed to produce the solid-liquid phase
transition.

The latent heat of vaporization (Lv) is the heat


per unit mass needed to produce the liquid-gas
phase transition.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.37): A 75 g cube of ice at


-10.0 C is placed in 0.500 kg of water at 50.0 C in an
insulating container so that no heat is lost to the
environment. Will the ice melt completely? What will be
the final temperature of this system?

The heat required to completely melt the ice is


Qice  mice cice Tice  mice Lf
 0.075 kg 2.1 kJ/kg C 10C   0.075 kg 333.7 kJ/kg 
 27 kJ

The heat required to cool the water to the freezing point is


Qw  mw cw Tw
 0.5 kg 4.186 kJ/kg C 50C 
 105 kJ Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Since Qice < Qwater the ice will completely melt.

To find the final temperature of the system, note that no


heat is lost to the environment; the heat lost by the water is
gained by the ice.
0  Qice  Qw
0  mice cice T  mice Lf  mice cw Tf  Tice,i   mw cw Tf  Tw,i 
0  mice cice T  mice Lf  mice  mw cwTf  mw cwTi
0  27 kJ  mice  mw cwTf  105 kJ
Tf  32.4 C
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.43): Compute the heat of fusion of


a substance from these data: 31.15 kJ will change 0.500 kg
of the solid at 21 C to liquid at 327 C, the melting point.
The specific heat of the solid is 0.129 kJ/kg K.

Q  mcT  mLf
Q  mcT
Lf   22.8 kJ/kg
m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

On a phase diagram, the


triple point is the set of
P and T where all three
phases can coexist in
equilibrium.

Sublimation is the process by which a solid phase


transitions into a gas (and gas  solid).
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The critical point marks the end of the vapor pressure


curve. A path around this point (i.e. the path does not cross
the curve) does not result in a phase transition. Past the
critical point it is not possible to distinguish between the
liquid and gas phases.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.6 Thermal Conduction

Through direct contact, heat can be conducted from regions


of high temperature to regions of low temperature. Energy
is transferred by collisions between neighboring atoms or
molecules.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

T
The rate of energy transfer by conduction is P  A
d

where  is the thermal conductivity, A is the cross-


sectional area, and T/d is the temperature gradient.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

d
Also T  P  PR
A
where R is the thermal resistance.

This is convenient when heat is conducted through multiple


layers because
n
Ttotal  P  Ri .
i 1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.50): A metal rod with a diameter


of 2.30 cm and a length of 1.10 m has one end immersed in
ice at 0 C and the other end in boiling water at 100 C. If
the ice melts at a rate of 1.32 grams every 175 s, what is
the thermal conductivity of the metal? Assume no heat loss
to the surrounding air.

Qc T
Heat is conducted to the ice at a rate of P   A .
t d
The heat conducted to the ice in a time period t is
T
Qc  A t .
d
The heat needed to melt a given mass of ice is Q  mice Lf .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Since all the heat conducted by the rod is absorbed by


the ice,

T
A t  mice Lf
d


mice Lf

0.00132 kg 1.10 m  333.7 103 J/kg  
A
T
t
2

 1.15 10 m 100 K 175 s 
2

d
 66.6 W/m K.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.55): For a temperature difference


of 20 C, one slab of material conducts 10.0 W/m2; another
of the same shape conducts 20.0 W/m2. What is the rate of
heat flow per m2 of surface when the slabs are placed side
by side with a total temperature difference of 20 C?

For each slab, the thermal resistance per square meter is

T 20.0 K 2
R1    2 . 00 K/W/m
P1 10.0 W/m 2
A
T 20.0 K 2
R2   2
 1 . 00 K/W/m .
P2 20.0 W/m
A

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

When the materials oneplaced in series, the rate of heat


flow is

T T
P 2
  6.67 W/m 2 .
R1  R2
R
i 1
i

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.7 Thermal Convection

Convection is the movement of heat by fluid currents.


Material is transported from one place to another.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The rate of energy transport by convection is P  hAT

where h is the coefficient of convection, A is a surface


area, and T
 is the temperature difference between the
surface and convecting fluid.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§14.8 Thermal Radiation

All bodies emit electromagnetic (EM) radiation. The perfect


absorber and emitter of EM radiation is called a blackbody.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The rate of energy emission by a blackbody is (Stefan’s


Law)
P  AT 4

where A is the surface area of the emitting body, T is its


temperature, and  = 5.67010-8 W/m2 K4 is the Stefan-
Boltzmann constant.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Since an ideal blackbody does not exist, Stefan’s law is


written as

P  eAT 4
where e is the emissivity; e = 0 for a perfect reflector of
EM radiation and e = 1 for perfect blackbody.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A spectrum shows the


amount of radiation emitted
at a particular wavelength.
For a blackbody, the peak of
the spectrum is determined
only by its temperature.

3
Wien’s law maxT  2.898 10 m K.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The net energy gained or lost by a blackbody at a


temperature T is


P  eAT 4  eATs4  eA T 4  Ts4 
where Ts is the temperature of the surroundings.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 14.69): A sphere with a diameter of


80 cm is held at a temperature of 250 C and is radiating
energy. If the intensity of the radiation detected at a
distance of 2.0 m from the sphere’s center is 102 W/m2,
what is the emissivity of the sphere?

The power emitted by a point source is P  4d 2 I .

P 4d 2 I
The emissivity is e  4

AT 4R 2T 4


102 W/m 2 2.0 m 2  

0.40 m 2 5.67 10 8 W/m 2 K 4 523 K 4 
 0.60.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Definition of Internal Energy


•Heat Capacity
•Specific Heat
•Phase Transitions
•Latent Heat
•Phase Diagrams
•Energy Transport by Conduction, Convection, and Radiation

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 15: Thermodynamics

•The First Law of Thermodynamics


•Thermodynamic Processes (isobaric, isochoric, isothermal, adiabatic)
•Reversible and Irreversible Processes
•Heat Engines
•Refrigerators and Heat Pumps
•The Carnot Cycle
•Entropy (The Second Law of Thermodynamics)
•The Third Law of Thermodynamics

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.1 The First Law of


Thermodynamics

The first law of thermodynamics says the change in


internal energy of a system is equal to the heat flow into the
system plus the work done on the system.

U  Q  W

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.2 Thermodynamic Processes

A state variable describes the state of a system at time t,


but it does not reveal how the system was put into that
state. Examples of state variables: pressure, temperature,
volume, number of moles, and internal energy.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A PV diagram can be used to represent the state changes


of a system, provided the system is always near
equilibrium.

The area under a PV curve


gives the magnitude of the
work done on a system.
W>0 for compression and
W<0 for expansion.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To go from the state (Vi, Pi) by the path (a) to the state (Vf,
Pf) requires a different amount of work then by path (b). To
return to the initial point (1) requires the work to be nonzero.

The work done on a system depends on the path taken in


the PV diagram. The work done on a system during a
closed cycle can be nonzero.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An isothermal process
implies that both P and
V of the gas change
(PVT).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.3 Thermodynamic Processes


for an Ideal Gas

No work is done on a system


when its volume remains
constant (isochoric process).
For an ideal gas (provided the
number of moles remains
constant), the change in internal
energy is
Q  U  nCV T .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a constant pressure (isobaric) process, the change in


internal energy is

U  Q  W
where W   PV   nRT and Q  nC P T .

CP is the molar specific heat at constant


pressure. For an ideal gas CP = CV+R.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a constant temperature (isothermal) process, U = 0


and the work done on an ideal gas is

 Vi 
W  nRT ln .
 Vf 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 15.7): An ideal monatomic gas is


taken through a cycle in the PV diagram. (a) If there are
0.0200 mol of this gas, what are the temperature and
pressure at point C?

From the graph:


Pc = 98.0 kPa

Using the ideal gas law

PcVc
Tc   1180 K.
nR

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the change in internal energy of the gas as


it is taken from point A to B?

This is an isochoric process so W = 0 and U = Q.

 3  PBVB PAVA 
U  Q  nCV T  n R   
 2  nR nR 
3
 PBVB  PAVA 
2
3
 V PB  PA   200 J
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) How much work is done by this gas per cycle?

The work done per cycle is the area between the


curves on the PV diagram. Here W=½VP = 66 J.

(d) What is the total change in internal energy of this


gas in one cycle?
 3  Pf Vf PiVi 
U  nCV T  n R   
 2  nR nR 
3 The cycle ends where
 Pf Vf  PiVi   0 it began (T = 0).
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 15.11): An ideal gas is in contact with


a heat reservoir so that it remains at constant temperature of
300.0 K. The gas is compressed from a volume of 24.0 L to
a volume of 14.0 L. During the process, the mechanical
device pushing the piston to compress the gas is found to
expend 5.00 kJ of energy. How much heat flows between
the heat reservoir and the gas, and in what direction does the
heat flow occur?

This is an isothermal process, so U = Q + W = 0 (for


an ideal gas) and W = -Q = -5.00 kJ. Heat flows from
the gas to the reservoir.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.4 Reversible and Irreversible


Processes

A process is reversible if it does not violate any law of


physics when it is run backwards in time. For example an
ice cube placed on a countertop in a warm room will melt.
The reverse process cannot occur: an ice cube will not
form out of the puddle of water on the countertop in a warm
room.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A collision between two billiard balls is reversible.


Momentum is conserved if time is run forward; momentum
is still conserved if time runs backwards.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Any process that involves dissipation of energy is not


reversible.

Any process that involves heat transfer from a hotter object


to a colder object is not reversible.

The second law of thermodynamics (Clausius Statement):


Heat never flows spontaneously from a colder body to a
hotter body.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.5 Heat Engines

A heat engine is a device designed to convert disordered


energy into ordered energy. The net work done by an
engine during one cycle is equal to the net heat flow into
the engine during the cycle (U= 0).

W net  Qnet

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The efficiency of an engine is defined as

net work done by the engine Wnet


e  .
heat input Qin

Note: Qnet = Qin - Qout

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.6 Refrigerators and Heat


Pumps

In a heat engine, heat flows from hot to cold, with work as


the output. In a heat pump, heat flows from cold to hot, with
work as the input.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The efficiency of a heat engine can be rewritten as

net work output Wnet


e 
heat input QH
QH  QC QC
  1 .
QH QH

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 15.15): (a) How much heat does an


engine with efficiency of 33.3 % absorb in order to deliver
1.00 kJ of work?

Wnet 1.00 kJ
QH    3.00 kJ
e 0.333

(b) How much heat is exhausted by the engine?

QC
e  1
QH
QC  1  e  QH  2.00 kJ
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.7 Reversible Engines and Heat


Pumps

A reversible engine can be used as an engine (heat input


from a hot reservoir and exhausted to a cold reservoir) or
as a heat pump (heat is taken from cold reservoir and
exhausted to a hot reservoir).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

From the second law of thermodynamics, no engine can


have an efficiency greater than that of an ideal reversible
engine that uses the same two reservoirs. The efficiency of
this ideal reversible engine is

TC
er  1  .
TH

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.8 Details of the Carnot Cycle

The ideal engine of the previous section is known as a


Carnot engine.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The Carnot cycle has four steps:

1. Isothermal expansion: takes in heat from hot reservoir;


keeping the gas temperature at TH.
2. Adiabatic expansion: the gas does work without heat
flow into the gas; gas temperature decreases to TC.
3. Isothermal compression: Heat QC is exhausted; gas
temperature remains at TC.
4. Adiabatic compression: raises the temperature back to
TH.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The Carnot cycle


illustrated

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 15.28): An engine operates


between temperatures 650 K and 350 K at 65.0% of its
maximum efficiency. (a) What is the efficiency of this
engine?

The maximum possible efficiency is

TC 350 K
er  1   1  0.462.
TH 650K

The engine operates at e = 0.65er = 0.30 or 30% efficiency.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) If 6.3103 J is exhausted to the low temperature reservoir,


how much work does the engine do?

The heats exchanged at the reservoirs are related to each


other through
QC  1  e  QH .

Wnet  QH  QC
QC  e 
  QC    QC  2.7 kJ
1  e 1 e 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.9 Entropy

Heat flows from objects of high temperature to objects at


low temperature because this process increases the
disorder of the system. Entropy is a measure of a system’s
disorder. Entropy is a state variable.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If an amount of heat Q flows into a system at constant


temperature, then the change in entropy is

Q
S  .
T

Every irreversible process increases the total entropy of the


universe. Reversible processes do not increase the total
entropy of the universe.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The second law of thermodynamics (Entropy Statement):


The entropy of the universe never decreases.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 15.50): An ice cube at 0.0 C is


slowly melting. What is the change in the ice cube’s entropy
for each 1.00 g of ice that melts?

To melt ice requires Q = mLf joules of heat. To melt one


gram of ice requires 333.7 J of energy.

The entropy change is

Q 333.7 J
S    1.22 J/K.
T 273 K

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.10 Statistical Interpretation of


Entropy

A microstate specifies the state of each constituent particle


in a thermodynamic system. A macrostate is determined
by the values of the thermodynamic state variables.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

number of microstates corresponding to the macrostate


probability of a macrostate 
total number of microstates for all possible macrostates

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The number of microstates for a given macrostate is related


to the entropy.

where  is the number


S  k ln  of microstates.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 15.61): For a system composed of


two identical dice, let the macrostate be defined as the sum
of the numbers showing on the top faces. What is the
maximum entropy of this system in units of Boltzmann’s
constant?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Sum Possible microstates


2 (1,1)
3 (1,2); (2,1)
4 (1,3); (2,2); (3,1)
5 (1,4); (2,3); (3,2); (4,1)
6 (1,5); (2,4), (3,3); (4,2); (5,1)
7 (1,6); (2,5); (3,4), (4,3); (5,2); (6,1)
8 (2,6); (3,5); (4,4) (5,3); (6,2)
9 (3,6); (4,5); (5,4) (6,3)
10 (4,6); (5,5); (6,4)
11 (5,6); (6,5)
12 (6,6)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The maximum entropy corresponds to a sum of 7 on


the dice. For this macrostate, Ω = 6 with an entropy of

S  k ln   k ln 6  1.79k .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§15.11 The Third Law of


Thermodynamics

It is impossible to cool a system to absolute zero.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•The Three Laws of Thermodynamics


•Thermodynamic Processes
•Reversible and Irreversible Processes
•Heat Engines and Heat Pumps
•Efficiency of an Engine
•Entropy

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 16: Electric Forces and


Fields

•Electric Charge
•Conductors & Insulators
•Coulomb’s Law
•Electric Field
•Motion of a Point Charge in a Uniform E-field
•Conductors in Electrostatic Equilibrium
•Gauss’s Law

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.1 Electric Charge

There are two kinds of electric charge: positive and negative.

A body is electrically neutral if the sum of all the charges in a


body is zero.

Charge is a conserved quantity.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The elementary unit of charge is e = 1.60210-19 C.

The charge on the electron is -1e.


The charge on the proton is +1e.
The charge on the neutron is 0e.

Experiments show that likes charges will repel each other


and unlike charges will attract each other and that the force
decreases with increasing distance between charges.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

- - +
+ + +
This body is electrically neutral. -
+ -
-

An object can become polarized if the charges within it can


be separated.

- +
By holding a - +
charged rod near +
+ + + + + -
the body, it can +
- +
be polarized. -

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.2 Conductors and Insulators

A conductor is made of material that allows electric charge to


move through it easily.

An insulator is made of material that does not allow electric


charge to move through it easily.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.3 Coulomb’s Law


The magnitude of the force k q1 q2
between two point charges is: F
r2
where q1 and q2 are the charges and r is the separation
between the two charges.

9 2 2
k  8.99 10 Nm /C
1
where k  and  0  8.85 10 12 C 2 /Nm 2
4 0
and 0 is called the permittivity of free space.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The electric force is directed between the centers of the two


point charges.

F12 F21
q1 q2 Attractive force
between q1 and q2.
r

q1 q2
Repulsive force F12 F21
between q1 and q2.
r
The electric force is an example of a long-range or field
force, just like the force of gravity.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the net force on the charge q1 due to the


other two charges? q1 = +1.2 C, q2 = -0.60 C, and q3 =
+0.20 C.

F21


F31

The net force on q1 is Fnet = F21 + F31

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The magnitudes of the forces are:

F21 
k q1 q2

9 10 9

Nm 2 /C 2 (1.2  10 6 C)(0.60  10 6 C)
r212 (1.2 m) 2  (0.5 m) 2
 3.8 10 3 N

F31 
k q1 q3

9  10 9

Nm 2 /C 2 (1.2 10 6 C)(0.20  10 6 C)
r312 (1.2 m) 2
 1.5  10 3 N
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The components of the net force are:

Fnet , x  F31, x  F21, x  F31  F21 cos   5.0  10 3 N


Fnet , y  F31, y  F21, y  0  F21 sin   1.4  10 3 N

1. 2 m
cos    0.92
1.3 m
Where from the figure
0. 5 m
sin    0.38
1.3 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The magnitude of the net force is:

Fnet  Fnet2 , x  Fnet2 , y  5.2 10 3 N

The direction of the net force is:


Fnet , y
tan    0.28
Fnet , x
  16

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 16.13): What is the ratio of the electric


force and gravitational force between a proton and an
electron separated by 5.310-11 m (the radius of a Hydrogen
atom)?

k q1 q2 q1  q2  e
Fe 
r2 m1  m p  1.67  10  27 kg
Gm1m2
Fg  m2  me  9.1110 31 kg
r2

Fe k q1 q2 ke 2
The ratio is:    2.3 1039
Fg Gm1m2 Gme m p

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.4 The Electric Field

Recall : Fg  mg Where g is the strength


of the gravitational field.

Similarly for electric forces


Fe  qE we can define the strength
of the electric field E.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a point charge of charge Q, the Fe k Q


magnitude of the force per unit charge E  2
at a distance r (the electric field) is: q r

The electric field at a point in space is found by adding all of


the electric fields present.

E net   Ei Be careful! The electric


i field is a vector!

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Find the electric field at the point P.

P
x
q1 = +e q2 = -2e x = 2m
x = 0m x = 1m

E is a vector. What is its direction?

Place a positive test charge at the point of interest. The


direction of the electric field at the location of the test
charge is the same as the direction of the force on the
test charge.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
P
x
q1 = +e q2 = -2e
Locate the
positive test
charge here.
P
x
q1 = +e q2 = -2e

Direction of E due
Direction of E due to charge 1
to charge 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The net electric field at point P is: E net  E1  E 2

The magnitude of the electric field is: Enet  E1  E2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

E1 
k q1

9 10 9

Nm 2 / C 2 (1.6 10 19 C)
 3.6  10 10
N/C
r2 (2 m) 2

E2 
k q2

9 10 9

Nm 2 / C 2 (2 *1.6 10 19 C)
 2. 9  10 9
N/C
r2 (1 m) 2

9
Enet  E1  E2  2.5  10 N/C

The net E-field is


directed to the left> Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Electric field lines

Electric field lines are a useful way to indicate what the


magnitude and direction of an electric field is in space.

Rules:
1. The direction of the E-field is tangent to the field lines at
every point in space.
2. The field is strong where there are many field lines and
weak where there are few lines.
3. The field lines start on + charges and end on – charges.
4. Field lines do not cross.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Pictorial representation of the rules on the previous slide:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.5 Motion of a Point Charge in a


Uniform E-Field

A region of space with a uniform


electric field containing a particle
of charge q (q>0) and mass m.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

FBD for the y


charge q
Fe
x

Apply Newton’s 2nd Law and


solve for the acceleration.
F x  Fe  ma
Fe  qE  ma
q
a E
m
One could now use the kinematic equations to solve for
distance traveled in a time interval, the velocity at the end of
a time interval, etc. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What electric field strength is needed to keep an


electron suspended in the air?

FBD for the Fe


electron:

To get an upward force on the electron, the electric field


must be directed toward the Earth.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Apply Newton’s 2nd Law: Fy  Fe  w  0


Fe  w
qE  eE  mg
mg
E  5.6  10 11 N/C
e

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 16.44): A horizontal beam of electrons


moving 4.0107 m/s is deflected vertically by the vertical
electric field between two oppositely charged parallel plates.
The magnitude of the field is 2.00104 N/C.

(a) What is the direction of the field between the plates?

From the top plate to the bottom plate


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the charge per unit area on the plates?

Q  This is the electric field


E 
0 A 0 between two charged plates.

Note that E here is independent of the distance from


the plates!

  E 0  2.00 10 4 N/C 8.85 10 12 C 2 /Nm 2 


 1.77  10 7 C/m 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:
(c) What is the vertical deflection d of the electrons as they
leave the plates? y

Fe
FBD for an electron
in the beam:
x

w
Apply Newton’s 2nd Law and solve for the acceleration:

F y  Fe  w  ma y
Fe  w Fe qE
ay 
m

m
g 
m
 g  3.52 1015  9.8 m/s  
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

What is the vertical position of the electron after it travels a


horizontal distance of 2.0 cm?

1 02 Time interval to
x  x0  vox t  a x t
2 travel 2.00 cm
horizontally
x  x0 0.02 m 10
t  7
 5 .0  10 sec
v0 x 4.0 10 m/s

0
1 2
y  y0  voy t  a y t Deflection of an
2 electron in the
1 2 beam
y  y0  d  a y t  4.4 10  4 m
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.6 Conductors in Electrostatic


Equilibrium

Conductors are easily polarized. These materials have free


electrons that are free to move around inside the material.

Any charges that are placed on a conductor will arrange


themselves in a stable distribution. This stable situation is
called electrostatic equilibrium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When a conductor is in electrostatic equilibrium, the E-field


inside it is zero.

Any net charge must reside on the surface of a conductor


in electrostatic equilibrium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Just outside the surface of a conductor in electrostatic


equilibrium the electric field must be perpendicular to the
surface.

If this were not true, then any surface


charge would have a net force acting
on it, and the conductor would not be
in electrostatic equilibrium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Any excess charge on the


surface of a conductor will
accumulate where the
surface is highly curved
(i.e. a sharp point).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§16.7 Gauss’s Law

Enclose a point
charge +Q with an
+Q
imaginary sphere.

Here, E-Field lines exit the sphere.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Look at a small patch


of the surface of the
imaginary sphere.

With a positive charge


inside the sphere you
would see electric field
lines leaving the surface.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

number of field lines


Recall that E 
A
so that the number of field lines  EA

It is only the component of the electric field that is


perpendicular to the surface that exits the surface.
E

Surface

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Define a quantity called flux, which is related to the number


of field lines that cross a surface:

flux   e  E A  E cos  A

E

This picture defines
the value of .

Flux > 0 when field lines exit the surface and flux < 0
when field lines enter the surface.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 16.58): Find the electric flux through


each side of a cube of edge length a in a uniform electric field
of magnitude E.

A cube has six sides: The field lines enter one face and exit
through another. What is the flux through each of the other
four faces?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

There is zero electric flux though the other four faces.


The electric field lines never enter/exit any of them.

The flux through the left face is –EA.


The flux through the right face is +EA.
The net flux through the cube is zero.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Since Eq, the flux through a surface can also be written as

Qinside
e  This is Gauss’s Law.
0

The flux through a surface depends on the amount of


charge inside the surface. Based on this, the cube in
the previous example contained no net charge.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Properties of Conductors/Insulators
•Charge Polarization
•Coulomb’s Law
•The Electric Field
•Motion of a Point Charge in an Electric Field
•Gauss’s Law

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 17: Electric Potential

•Electric Potential Energy


•Electric Potential
•How are the E-field and Electric Potential related?
•Motion of Point Charges in an E-field
•Capacitors
•Dielectrics

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.1 Electric Potential Energy

Electric potential energy (Ue) is energy stored in the electric


field.

•Ue depends only on the location, not upon the path taken
to get there (conservative force).
•Ue = 0 at some reference point.
•For two point particles take Ue = 0 at r = .

kq1q2
Ue 
•For the electric force r Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A proton and an electron, initially separated by a


distance r, are brought closer together. How does the
potential energy of this system of charges charge?

ke 2
For these two charges U e  
r

Bringing the charges closer together decreases r:.

U e  U ef  U ei  0

This is like a mass falling near the surface of the Earth;


positive work is done by the field.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued

How will the electric potential energy change if both


particles have positive (or negative) charges?

When q1 and q2 have the same algebraic sign then


 e > 0.
U

This means that work must be done by an external


agent to bring the charges closer together.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What is the potential energy of a system (arrangement) of


point charges? To calculate:

Begin by placing the first charge at a place in space


far from any other charges. No work is required to
do this.

Next, bring in the remaining charges one at a time


until the desired configuration is finished.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: What is the potential energy of three point charges


arranged as a right triangle? (See text Example 17.2)

q2 q2

r23 r12
r12 r23

q1 q3 q1 q3
r13 r13

kq1q2 kq1q3 kq2 q3 kq1q2 kq1q3 kq2 q3


Ue  0    Ue  0   
r12 r13 r23 r12 r13 r23

Are these the same? Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.2 Electric Potential

Electric potential is the electric potential energy per unit


charge.
Ue
V
qtest

Electric potential (or just potential) is a measurable scalar


quantity. Its unit is the volt (1 V = 1 J/C).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

U e kQ
For a point charge of charge Q: V 
qtest r

When a charge q moves through a potential difference


of V, its potential energy change is Ue = q V.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A charge Q = +1 nC is placed somewhere in space


far from other charges. Take ra = rb = rc = rd = 1.0 m and re =
rf = rg = 2.0 m.

f
b
c

Q
e a

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(a) Compare the potential at points d and g.

Since Q>0 the potential at point d is greater than at


point g, it is closer to the charge Q.

(b) Compare the potential at points a and b.

The potential at point a is the same as at point b;


both are at the same distance from the charge Q.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) Place a charge of +0.50 nC at point e. What will the


change in potential (V) be if this charge is moved to point
a?

Ve  
 
kQ 9.0  109 Nm 2 /C 2 1.0 nC 
 4.5 Volts
re 2m

Va  
 
kQ 9.0  109 Nm 2 /C 2 1.0 nC 
 9.0 Volts
ra 1m

V = Vf – Vi = Va-Ve = +4.5 Volts

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(d) What is the change in potential energy (U) of the


+0.50 nC charge ?

Ue =qV = (+0.50 nC)(+4.5 Volts)= +2.3 nJ

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(e) How would the results of the previous questions change


if instead of a +1.0 nC charge there is a -1.0 nC charge in its
place?

(a)The potential at point d is less than the potential at


point g.
(b) Unchanged
(c) -4.5 V
(d) -2.3 nJ

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.3 The Relationship between E


and V

f
b
The circles are c

called equipotentials e a
Q
(surfaces of equal +9 V
potential).
+4.5 V
d

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The electric field will point in the direction of maximum


potential decrease and will also be perpendicular to the
equipotential surfaces.

f
b
c

Q +9 V +4.5 V
e a

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Equipotentials
and field lines
for a dipole.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Uniform E-field

V1 V2 V3 V4

Equipotential surfaces

Ue Where d is the distance


V   Ed
q over which V occurs.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the electric field inside a conductor is zero, what is the


value of the potential?

If E=0, then V=0. The potential is constant!

What is the value of V inside the conductor? It will be


the value of V on the surface of the conductor.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.4 Moving Charges

When only electric forces act on a charge, its total


mechanical energy will be conserved.

Ei  E f

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 17.31): Point P is at a potential of


500.0 kV and point S is at a potential of 200.0 kV. The space
between these points is evacuated. When a charge of +2e
moves from P to S, by how much does its kinetic energy
change?
Ei  E f
Ki  U i  K f  U f

K f  K i  U i  U f  U f  U i 
 U   qV   q Vs  V p 
  2e 200.0  500.0 kV
14
 9.6  10 J
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 17.32): An electron is accelerated from


rest through a potential difference. If the electron reaches a
speed of 7.26106 m/s, what is the potential difference?

Ei  E f
Ki  U i  K f  U f
0

K f  U   qV
1 2
mv f   qV
2

V  
mv f
2


9.1110 31 kg 7.26 106 m/s   2

2q 2  1.60 10 19 C  


 150 Volts Note: the electron moves
from low V to high V.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.5 Capacitors
A capacitor is a device that stores electric potential energy
by storing separated positive and negative charges. Work
must be done to separate the charges.

+ + + + + + +
Parallel plate
capacitor
- - - - - - -

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a parallel plate capacitor:

EQ
E  V
 Q  V

Written as an equality: Q = CV, where the proportionality


constant C is called the capacitance.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What is the capacitance for a parallel plate capacitor?

 Q
V  Ed  d  d
0 0 A
0 A
Q  V  CV
d
0 A
where C  .
d

Note: C depends only on constants and geometrical factors.


The unit of capacitance is the farad (F). 1 F = 1 C2/J = 1 C/V

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 17.42): A parallel plate capacitor


has a capacitance of 1.20 nF. There is a charge of
magnitude 0.800 C on each plate.

(a) What is the potential difference between the plates?

Q  CV
Q 0.800 C
V    667 Volts
C 1.20 nF

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) If the plate separation is doubled, while the charge is


kept constant, what will happen to the potential difference?

Q Qd
V  
C 0 A
V  d

If d is doubled so is the potential difference.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 17.86): A parallel plate capacitor has a


charge of 0.020 C on each plate with a potential difference
of 240 volts. The parallel plates are separated by 0.40 mm of
air.

(a) What is the capacitance of this capacitor?

Q 0.020 C
C   8.3 10 11 F  83 pF
V 240 Volts

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the area of a single plate?

0 A
C
d
A
Cd

83 pF0.40 mm 
0 8.85  10 12 C 2 / Nm 2
 0.0038 m 2  38 cm 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.6 Dielectrics

As more and more charge is placed on capacitor plates,


there will come a point when the E-field becomes strong
enough to begin to break down the material (medium)
between the capacitor plates.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To increase the capacitance, a dielectric can be placed


between the capacitor plates.

C   C0
0 A
where C0 
d

and  is the dielectric constant.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 17.55): A capacitor can be made from


two sheets of aluminum foil separated by a sheet of waxed
paper. If the sheets of aluminum are 0.3 m by 0.4 m and the
waxed paper, of slightly larger dimensions, is of thickness
0.030 mm and has  = 2.5, what is the capacitance of this
capacitor?

0 A
C0 
d


 
8.85  10 12 Nm 2 /C 2 0.40 * 0.30 m 2
0.030  10 -3 m
 3.54  10 8 F

and C   C 0  2.5 3.54  10 8 F  8.85 10 8 F. 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§17.7 Energy Stored in a Capacitor

A capacitor will store energy equivalent to the amount of


work that it takes to separate the charges.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The energy stored in the electric field between the plates is:

1
U  QV
2
1 2
 C V 

}
2 These are found by
using Q=CV and
Q2
 the first relationship.
2C

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 17.63): A parallel plate capacitor is


composed of two square plates, 10.0 cm on a side, separated
by an air gap of 0.75 mm.

(a) What is the charge on this capacitor when the potential


difference is 150 volts?

0 A 8
Q  CV  V  1.77 10 C
d

(b) What energy is stored in this capacitor?

1
U  QV  1.33 10 6 J
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Electric Potential Energy


•Electric Potential
•The Relationship Between E and V
•Motion of Point Charges (conservation of energy)
•Parallel Plate Capacitors (capacitance, dielectrics, energy
storage)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 18: Electric Current and


Circuits
•Electric current
•EMF
•Current & Drift Velocity
•Resistance & Resistivity
•Kirchhoff’s Rules
•Series & Parallel Circuit Elements
•Applications of Kichhoff’s Rules
•Power & Energy
•Ammeters & Voltmeters
•RC Circuits
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.1 Electric Current

e- e- e-
e- A metal wire.
e- e- e- e-

Assume electrons
flow to the right.

q Current is a measure of the amount


Current : I  of charge that passes though an area
t
perpendicular to the flow of charge.

Current units: 1C/sec = 1 amp


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A current will flow until there is no potential difference.

The direction of current flow in a wire is opposite the flow of


the electrons. (In the previous drawing the current is to the
left.)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: If a current of 80.0 mA exists in a metal wire, how


many electrons flow past a given cross-section of the wire
in 10.0 minutes?

q
I
t

q  It  80.0  10 3 A 600 sec   48.0 C 
q
# of electrons 
charge per electron
48.0 C

1.60  10 -19 C/electron
 3.00 10 20 electrons
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.2 EMF and Circuits

An ideal battery maintains a constant potential difference.


This potential difference is called the battery’s EMF().

The work done by an ideal battery in pumping a charge q


is W=q.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

At high potential

The circuit symbol for a


+
battery (EMF source) is -

At low potential

Batteries do work by converting chemical energy into


electrical energy. A battery dies when it can no longer
sustain its chemical reactions and so can do no more work
to move charges.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.3 Microscopic View of Current


in a Metal

Electrons in a metal might have a speed of ~106 m/s, but


since the direction of travel is random, an electron has
vdrift = 0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Only when the ends of a wire are at different potentials


(E0) will there be a net flow of electrons along the wire
(vdrift  0). Typically, vdrift < 1 mm/sec.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Calculate the number of charges (Ne) that pass through the


shaded region in a time t:

l
N e  n( Al )
 nA(vd t )

q eN e
The current in the wire is: I    neAvd
t t
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 18.19): A copper wire of cross-


sectional area 1.00 mm2 has a constant current of 2.0 A
flowing along its length. What is the drift speed of the
conduction electrons? Copper has 1.101029 electrons/m3.

I  neAvd
I 2.0 A
vd  
 
neA 1.10 10 29 m -3 1.60 10-19 C 1.00 10 6 m 2  
 1.110  4 m/sec  0.11 mm/sec

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.4 Resistance and Resistivity

A material is considered ohmic if VI, where

V  IR

The proportionality constant R is called resistance and is


measured in ohms (; and 1  = 1 V/A).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

L
The resistance of a conductor is: R
A

where  is the resistivity of the material, L is the length of


the conductor, and A is its cross sectional area.

With R a material is considered a conductor if  is “small”


and an insulator if  is “large”.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The resistivity of a material depends on its temperature:

   0 1   T  T0 

where 0 is the resistivity at the temperature T0, and  is


the temperature coefficient of resistivity.

A material is called a superconductor if =0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 18.28): The resistance of a conductor


is 19.8  at 15.0 C and 25.0  at 85.0 C. What is the
temperature coefficient of resistivity?

Values of R are given at different temperatures, not


values of . But the two quantities are related.

L
R   (1)    0 1   T  T0  (2)
A
Multiply both sides of equation (2) by L/A and use
equation (1) to get:

R  R0 1   T  T0  (3)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Solve equation (3) for  and evaluate using the given


quantities:

R 25.0 
1 1
R0 19 . 8  3 -1
   3.75  10 C
T 85.0 C  15.0 C

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.5 Kirchhoff’s Rules

Junction rule: The current that flows into a junction is the


same as the current that flows out. (Charge is conserved)

A junction is a place where two or more wires (or other


components) meet.

Loop rule: The sum of the voltage dropped around a closed


loop is zero. (Energy is conserved.)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a resistor: If you cross a resistor in the direction of the


current flow, the voltage drops by an amount IR (write as –
IR). There is a voltage rise if you cross the other way
(write as +IR).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For batteries (or other sources of EMF): If you move from


the positive to the negative terminal the potential drops by 
(write as –). The potential rises if you cross in the other
direction (write as +).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A current will only flow around a closed loop.

A B
VAB is the
terminal
voltage.

VAB  IR  0
Applying the loop rule:
  Ir  IR  0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

In a circuit, if the current always flows in the same direction


it is called a direct current (DC) circuit.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.6 Series and Parallel Circuits


Resistors:

The current through the two


resistors is the same. It is not
“used up” as it flows around
the circuit!

These resistors are in series.

Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule:   IR1  IR2  0


  IR1  IR2  I ( R1  R2 )  IReq
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The pair of resistors R1 and R2 can be replaced with a


single equivalent resistor provided that Req=R1 + R2.

In general, for resistors in series Req  R1  R2    Rn


n
  Ri .
i 1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Current only flows around closed loops. When the current


reaches point A it splits into two currents. R1 and R2 do not
have the same current through them, they are in parallel.

Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule:

  I1 R1  0
  I 2 R2  0

The potential drop across


each resistor is the same.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Applying the junction rule at A: I =I1+I2.

From the loop rules:   I1 R1  I 2 R2

Substituting for I1 and I2 in the junction rule:

 
I 
R1 R2
I 1 1 1
  
 R1 R2 Req
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The pair of resistors R1 and R2 can be replaced with a


single equivalent resistor provided that

1 1 1
  .
Req R1 R2

In general, for resistors in parallel


1 1 1 1
  
Req R1 R2 Rn
n
1
 .
i 1 Ri
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 18.40): In the given circuit, what is


the total resistance between points A and B?

R1= 15
A

R 2=
R 3=
12  24 

1 1 1
R2 and R3 are in parallel. Replace  
with an equivalent resistor R23. R23 R2 R3
R23  8 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The circuit can now be redrawn:


R1= 15
A
The resistors R23
and R1 are in series:
R23=8 

R123  R1  R23
 23   Req
B

A
Is the equivalent
R123 circuit and the total
=23  resistance is 23 .
B
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Capacitors:

C1 C2
For capacitors in series the charge
on the plates is the same.

Q Q
  0
Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule: C1 C2
 1 1 1
  
Q C1 C2 Ceq

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The pair of capacitors C1 and C2 can be replaced with a


single equivalent capacitor provided that

1 1 1
  .
Ceq C1 C2

In general, for capacitors in series


1 1 1 1
  
Ceq C1 C2 Cn
n
1
 .
i 1 Ci
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

C2

C1 Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule:

Q1
  0
C1
 Q2
 0
C2

For capacitors in parallel the charge on the plates may be


different. Here
Qeq  Q1  Q2
 Ceq   C1   C2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The pair of capacitors C1 and C2 can be replaced with a


single equivalent capacitor provided that Ccq= C1 + C2.

In general, for capacitors in parallel

n
Ceq  C1  C2    Cn   Ci .
i 1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 18.49): Find the value of a single


capacitor that replaces the three in the circuit below if
C1 = C2 = C3 = 12 F.
C1

C2 and C3 are in parallel


C3 C2
C23  C2  C3
 24 F
B

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The circuit can be redrawn:


C1

A
The remaining two capacitors
are in series.
1 1 1
 
C23 C123 C1 C23
1 1
 
B
12 F 24 F
C123  8 F
A

C123
Is the final, equivalent circuit.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
B 33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.7 Circuit Analysis Using


Kirchhoff’s Rules

To solve multiloop circuit problems:

1. Assign polarity (+/-) to all EMF sources.


2. Assign currents to each branch of the circuit.
3. Apply Kirchhoff’s rules.
4. Solve for the unknowns.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 18.53): Find the three unknown


currents (the current in each resistor).
I3

+ -
2 R3
I2

R2
+ I1
-

1 R1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Loop EDCFE:  1  I1 R1  I 2 R2  0

Loop AFCBA:  2  I 2 R2  I 3 R3  0
Note: Could also use Loop AFEDCBA

Junction C: I1  I 2  I 3
Note: could also use junction F
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The point is to write down three equations for the three


unknown currents.

(1) I1 R1  I 2 R2   1

(2) I 3 R3  I 2 R2   2

(3) I1  I 2  I 3

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Substitute (3) into (1): R1  R2 I 2  R1I 3  1 (4)

R3 I 3  R2 I 2   2 (2)

Multiply the top equation by –R3 and the bottom equation


by +R1, add the equations together, then solve for I2.

 R3 R1  R2 I 2  R1 R3 I 3  R1 R3 I 3  R1 R2 I 2  R1 2 R3 1


R1 2 R3 1
I2 
 R3 R1  R2   R1 R2
I 2  0.123 amps
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Substitute I2 = -0.123 amps in to (2):


 2  I 2 R2
I3 
R3
I 3  0.199 amps

Now substitute the known values of I2 and I3 into (3):

I1  I 2  I 3
 0.123 amps  0.199 amps
 0.076 amps
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The negative sign on I2 means that instead of the current


going from right to left (from point C to point F) in the branch
with resistor 2, it really goes from left to right. It is essential
to keep the negative sign when evaluating your equations
numerically. Make the correction only when the problem is
finished.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.8 Power and Energy in Circuits

U q
The energy dissipation rate is: P  V  IV
t t

For an EMF source: P  I


2
V
For a resistor: P  IV  I 2 R 
R

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.9 Measuring Currents and


Voltages

Current is measured with an ammeter. An ammeter is placed


in series with a circuit component.

A1 A1 measures the
An ammeter R1 current through R1.
has a low
internal A2 A2 measures the
resistance. R2 current through R2.
A3 A3 measures the
current drawn from
 the EMF.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A voltmeter is used to measure the potential drop across a


circuit element. It is placed in parallel with the component.
A voltmeter has a large internal resistance.

The voltmeter measures the


voltage drop across R1.
R1

R2


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§18.10 RC Circuits

Switch R Close the switch at t=0 to


start the flow of current.
+- C
The capacitor is being
+
- charged.

Q
Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule:   IR   0
C
Q
Note : I 
t
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
44
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The current I(t) that satisfies Kirchhoff’s loop rule is:

t
I t   I 0 e 


where I0  and   RC.
R

 is the RC time constant and is a measure of the


charge (and discharge) rate of a capacitor.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


45
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The voltage drop  t 


across the capacitor is: VC t    1  e  
 

The voltage drop


across the resistor is:
VR t   I t R

The charge on the


capacitor is: Q C t   CVC t 

Note: Kirchhoff’s loop rule must be satisfied for all times.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
46
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Plots of the voltage drop across the (charging) capacitor


and current in the circuit.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


47
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

While the capacitor is charging S2 is open. After the capacitor


is fully charged S1 is opened at the same time S2 is closed:
this removes the battery from the circuit. Current will now
flow in the right hand loop only, discharging the capacitor.

I Apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule:


S1 R
S2
+- C Q
 IR   0
C

t
The current in the circuit is I t   I 0 e 
.
t
But the voltage drop across the capacitor is now VC t    e 
.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
48
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The voltage drop across the discharging capacitor:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


49
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 18.83): A capacitor is charged to an


initial voltage of V0=9.0 volts. The capacitor is then
discharged through a resistor. The current is measured and
is shown in the figure.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


50
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(a) Find C, R, and the total energy dissipated in the resistor.

Use the graph to determine . I0=100 mA; the current is


I0/e = 36.8 mA at t= 13 msec.

I 0  100 mA 
R
  13 msec  RC
Since  = V0 = 9.0 volts, R = 90  and C = 144 F.

All of the energy stored in the capacitor is eventually


dissipated by the resistor.
1 2
U  CV0  5.8  10 3 J
2 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
51
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) At what time is the energy in the capacitor half of the


initial value?
1 1
U (t )  CV (t ) and U (t  0)  CV02
2

2 2

1 1
Want: U (t )  U (t  0)  CV02
2 4
1 2 1 2
CV (t )  CV0
2 4
1
V (t )  V0
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
52
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Solve for t:

t
 1
V (t )  V0 e  V0
2
t   ln 2  13 msec  ln 2  4.5 msec

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


53
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary
•Current & Drift Velocity
•Resistance & Resistivity
•Ohm’s Law
•Kirchhoff’s Rules
•Series/Parallel Resistors/Capacitors
•Power
•Voltmeters & Ammeters
• RC Circuits
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
54
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 19: Magnetic Forces and


Fields
•Magnetic Fields
•Magnetic Force on a Point Charge
•Motion of a Charged Particle in a Magnetic Field
•Crossed E and B fields
•Magnetic Forces on Current Carrying Wires
•Torque on a Current Loop
•Magnetic Field Due to a Current
•Ampère’s Law
•Magnetic Materials
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.1 Magnetic Fields


All magnets have
Magnetic Dipole at least one north
pole and one south
pole.

Field lines emerge from north


poles and enter through south
poles. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Magnets exert forces on one another.

Opposite magnetic poles attract and like magnetic


poles repel.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Magnetic field lines are closed loops. There is no (known!)


source of magnetic field lines. (No magnetic monopoles)

If a magnet is broken in half you just end up with two


magnets.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Near the surface of


the Earth, the
magnetic field is
that of a dipole.

Note the
orientation of
the magnetic
poles!

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Away from the Earth, the magnetic field is distorted by the


solar wind.

Evidence for magnetic pole reversals has been found on the


ocean floor. The iron bearing minerals in the rock contain a
record of the Earth’s magnetic field.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.2 Magnetic Force on a Point


Charge

The magnetic force on a point charge is:

FB  qv  B 

The unit of magnetic field (B) is the tesla (1T = 1 N/Am).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnitude of FB is: FB  qBv sin  

where vsin is the component of the velocity perpendicular


to the direction of the magnetic field.  represents the angle
between v and B.

v Draw the vectors tail-


to-tail to determine .
 B

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The direction of FB is found from the right-hand rule.

For a general cross product: C  AB

The right-hand rule is: using your right hand, point your
fingers in the direction of A and curl them in the direction
of B. Your thumb points in the direction of C.

Note : C  A  B  B  A
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 19.15): An electron moves with


speed 2.0105 m/s in a 1.2 Tesla uniform magnetic field. At
one instant, the electron is moving due west and
experiences an upward magnetic force of 3.210-14 N.
What is the direction of the magnetic field?
y
FB  qBv sin 
FB
sin    0.8323  
qBv
x
v (west) F (up)
  56
The angle can be either north
of west OR north of east.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.3 Charged Particle Moving


Perpendicular to a Uniform B-field

     
A positively charged particle
     
has a velocity v (orange
      arrow) as shown. The
      magnetic field is into the page.
     

The magnetic force, at this instant, is shown in blue. In this


region of space this positive charge will move CCW in a
circular path.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Applying Newton’s 2nd Law to the charge:

F  FB  mar
v2
qvB  m
r

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Mass Spectrometer
     
B      
A charged particle is      
shot into a region of      
known magnetic field.
     
Detector
v2 V
Here, qvB  m Particles of different mass will
r
travel different distances before
or qBr  mv
striking the detector. (v, B, and
q can be controlled.)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Other devices that use magnetic fields to bend particle


paths are cyclotrons and synchrotrons.

Cyclotrons are used in the production of


radioactive nuclei. For medical uses see the
website of the Nuclear Energy Institute.

Synchrotrons are being tested for use in


treating tumors.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.4 Motion of a Charged Particle


in a Uniform B-field

If a charged particle has a component


of its velocity perpendicular to B, then
its path will be a circle. If it also a
component of v parallel to B, then it
will move forward as well. This
resulting path is a helix.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.5 Crossed E and B Fields

If a charged particle enters a region of space with both


electric and magnetic fields present, the force on the
particle will be

F  Fe  FB
 qE  q v  B .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a region of space with crossed electric and


magnetic fields.

Charge       B (into page)


q>0 with
     
velocity v
     
     
     

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The value of the charge’s speed can be adjusted so that

Fnet  Fe  FB  0.

The net force equal zero will occur when v=E/B.

This region of space (with crossed E and B


fields) is called a “velocity selector”. It can be
used as part of a mass spectrometer.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.6 Magnetic Force on a Current


Carrying Wire

The force on a current carrying


wire in an external magnetic field
is
F  I L  B 
L is a vector that points in the
direction of the current flow. Its
magnitude is the length of the wire.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnitude of F  I L  B  is

F  ILB sin 
and its direction is given by the right-hand rule.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 19.43): A 20.0 cm by 30.0 cm loop


of wire carries 1.0 A of current clockwise.

(a) Find the magnetic force on each side of the loop if the
magnetic field is 2.5 T to the left.

I= 1.0 A
Left: F out of page
Top: no force
B Right: F into page
Bottom: no force

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The magnitudes of the nonzero forces are:

F  ILB sin 
 1.0 A 0.20 m 2.5 T sin 90
 0.50 N

(b) What is the net force on the loop?

Fnet  0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.7 Torque on a Current Loop

Consider a current carrying loop in a magnetic field. The


net force on this loop is zero, but the net torque is not.

Axis
Force Force
into out of
page page
B

L/2 L/2 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The net torque on the current loop is:

  NIAB sin 
N = number of turns of wire in the loop.
I = the current carried by the loop.
A = area of the loop.
B = the magnetic field strength.
 = the angle between A and B.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The direction of A is defined with a right-hand rule. Curl


the fingers of your right hand in the direction of the current
flow around a loop and your thumb will point in the direction
of A.

Because there is a torque on the current loop, it must have


both a north and south pole. A current loop is a magnetic
dipole. (Your thumb, using the above RHR, points from
south to north.)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.8 Magnetic Field due to a


Current

Moving charges (a current) create magnetic fields.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnetic field at a distance r from a long, straight wire


carrying current I is

0 I
B
2r

where 0 = 410-7 Tm/A is the permeability of free space.

The direction of the B-field lines is given by a right-hand


rule. Point the thumb of your right hand in the direction of
the current flow while wrapping your hand around the wire;
your fingers will curl in the direction of the magnetic field
lines.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A wire carries
current I out of
the page.

The B-field lines of


this wire are CCW.

Note: The field (B) is tangent to the field lines.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 19.62): Two parallel wires in a


horizontal plane carry currents I1 and I2 to the right. The
wires each have a length L and are separated by a
distance d.
1 I

2 I

(a) What are the magnitude and direction of the B-field of


wire 1 at the location of wire 2?

 0 I1
B1  Into the page
2d Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What are the magnitude and direction of the magnetic


force on wire 2 due to wire 1?

F12  I 2 LB1 sin 


 0 I1 I 2 L F12 toward top of
 I 2 LB1 
2d page (toward wire 1)

(c) What are the magnitude and direction of the B-field of


wire 2 at the location of wire 1?

0 I 2
B2  Out of the page
2d Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(d) What are the magnitude and direction of the magnetic


force on wire 1 due to wire 2?

F21  I1 LB2 sin 


 0 I1 I 2 L F21 toward bottom of
 I1 LB2  page (toward wire 2)
2d

(e) Do parallel currents attract or repel? They attract.

(f) Do antiparallel currents attract or repel? They repel.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnetic field of a current loop:

The strength of the B-field at


the center of the (single) wire
loop is:
0 I
B
2R

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnetic field of a solenoid:

A solenoid is a coil of wire that is wrapped in a cylindrical


shape.

The field inside a solenoid is nearly uniform (if you stay


away from the ends) and has a strength:

B   0 nI
Where n=N/L is the number of turns of wire (N) per unit
length (L) and I is the current in the wire.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.9 Ampère’s Law

Ampère’s Law relates the magnetic field on a path to the


net current cutting through the path.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 19.65): A number of wires carry


current into or out of the page as indicated.

(a) What is the net


current though the
interior of loop 1?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Assume currents into the page are negative and current


out of the page are positive.

Loop 1 encloses currents -3I, +14I, and -6I. The net


current is +5I or 5I out of the page.

(b) What is the net current though the interior of loop 2?

Loop 2 encloses currents -16I and +14I. The net


current is -2I or 2I into the page.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Define circulation: circulation   B|| l

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a wire carrying current into the page. Draw a


closed path around the wire.

Here the B-field is tangent


to the path everywhere
(hence the choice of a
circular path). The
circulation is

 B l  B2r .
||

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Ampere’s Law is  B l   I
|| 0

where I is the net current that cuts


through the circular path.

If the wire from the previous page carries a current I then


the magnetic field at distance r from the wire is

0 I
B .
2r

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§19.10 Magnetic Materials

Ferromagnetic materials have domains, regions in which


its atomic dipoles are aligned, giving the region a strong
dipole moment.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When the domains are


oriented randomly there
will be no net
magnetization of the
object.

When the domains are


aligned, the material will
have a net magnetization.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Magnetic forces are felt only by moving charges


•Right-Hand Rules
•Magnetic Force on a Current Carrying Wire
•Torque on a Current Loop
•Magnetic Field of a Current Carrying Wire (straight wire,
wire loop, solenoid)
•Ampère’s Law

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 20: Electromagnetic


Induction
•Motional EMF
•Electric Generators
•Faraday’s Law
•Lenz’s Law
•Transformers
•Eddy Currents
•Induced Electric Fields
•Mutual- and Self-Inductance
•LR Circuits

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.1 Motional EMF

Consider a conductor in a B-field moving to the right.

     
     
     
V
     
     
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An electron in the conductor


FB  q v  B 
experiences a force downward.

The electrons in the


e- bar will move toward
V the bottom of the bar.
F

This creates an electric field in the bar and results in a


potential difference between the top and bottom of the bar.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What if the bar were placed across conducting rails (in red)
so that there is a closed loop for the electrons to follow?

     
     
      L
V
     
     
In this circuit, the electrons flow clockwise;
the current is counterclockwise.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The motional EMF is   vBL


where L is the separation
between the rails.

V  vBL
The current in the rod is I  
R R R
where R is the resistance
in the “wires”.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The rod has a current through it. What is the direction of


the magnetic force on the rod due to the external magnetic
field?

F  I L  B 

The magnitude of the magnetic force on the rod is:

vBL vB 2 L2
F  ILB sin 90  ILB  LB 
R R
Using the right hand rule, the force on the bar is directed
to the left.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To maintain a constant EMF, the rod must be towed to the


right with constant speed. An external agent must do work
on the bar. (Energy conservation)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.2 Electric Generators

A coil of wire is spun in a magnetic field. This produces


an EMF and also a current; both vary with time. (AC-
alternating current)

An energy source is needed to turn the wire coil. Examples


include burning coal or natural gas to produce steam; falling
water.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The EMF produced by an AC generator is:

 t    0 sin t

In the United States and Canada 0 = 170 volts and f =


/2 = 60 Hz.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.3 Faraday’s Law

Moving a conductor through a B-field will generate an EMF.


Another way to generate an EMF is to place a stationary
conductor in a B-field that varies with time.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnetic flux is proportional to the number of B-field


lines that cross a given area.

The unit of magnetic flux is


 B  BA cos  the weber: 1 Wb = 1 Tm2

     
Loop of wire
with area A      
     
     
     
     
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

 B
Faraday’s Law:    N
t

An induced EMF in a “coil” of N loops is due to a changing


magnetic flux.

Ways to induce an EMF:


1. Vary the magnetic field.
2. Vary the area of the coil.
3. Change the angle between B and A.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: If the magnetic field in a region varies with time


according to the graph shown below, find the magnitude of
the induced EMF in a single loop of wire during the following
time intervals: (a) 0-2.0 ms, (b) 2.0-4.0 ms, and (c) 4.0-8.0
ms. The loop has area 0.500 m2 and the plane of the loop is
perpendicular to the B-field.

B (T)

0.50 T

t (ms)
2 4 8

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Using Faraday’s Law:

  B   B 
      A 
 t   t 

This is the slope of


the given B versus
time graph.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(a) In the interval 0.0-2.0 ms,

 B  2  0.50T-0.00T 
   A   0.500 m  3

  130 V. 
 t   2.0  10 s 

(b) In the interval 2.0-4.0 ms,

 B  2  0.50T-0.50T 
   A   0.500 m  3

  0 V. 
 t   2.0  10 s 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) In the interval 4.0-8.0 ms,

 B   0.00T-0.50T 
   A   0.500 m
2
 
 3   63 V.
 t   4.0 10 s 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.4 Lenz’s Law

The direction of induced EMFs and currents always oppose


the change in flux that produced them.

That is, the induced I (and thus induced B) tries


to keep the total flux through the loop constant.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Towing the bar to the right produced an induced


current that was CCW. What is the direction of the induced
magnetic field?

     
     
      L
V
     
     
The induced B is out of the page to maintain the flux
originally through the loop before the bar started to move
to the right (the area of the loop is increasing). Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 20.12): A long straight wire carrying a


steady current is in the plane of a circular loop of wire. (a) If
the loop of wire is moved closer to the wire, what is the
direction of the induced current in the wire loop?

Wire loop

There is a magnetic field into the page at the location of the


loop. As the loop gets closer to the wire there is an increase
in flux. To negate this increase in flux, the induced B-field
must point out of the page. This requires a CCW current.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) At one instant, the induced EMF in the loop is 3.5 mV.
What is the rate of change of the magnetic flux through
the loop in that instant?

 B
   3.5 mV  3.5 10 3 Wb / s
t

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.5 Transformers

Wrap an iron
core with wire. Secondary
Primary
coil
coil

Apply a varying voltage to the primary coil. This causes a


changing magnetic flux in the secondary coil.

 B  B
 1   N1  2  N2
t t
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Since the flux through the coils is the same

 1 N1 The “turns ratio” gives



 2 N2 the ratio of the EMFs.

Depending on the turns ratio, a transformer can be used to


step-up or step-down a voltage.

The rate that power is supplied to both coils is the same

 1 I 2 N1
 
 2 I1 N 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 20.25): A step-down transformer has a


turns ratio of 1/100. An AC voltage of amplitude 170 V is
applied to the primary. If the primary current is 1.0 mA, what
is the secondary current?

I 2 N1

I1 N 2
 N1   100 
I 2    I1   1.0 mA  0.1 A
 N2   1 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 20.27): The primary coil of a


transformer has 250 turns and the secondary coil has 1000
turns. An AC voltage is sent through the primary. The EMF
of the primary is 16.0 V. What is the EMF in the secondary?

 1 N1

 2 N2
 N2   1000 
 2    1   16.0 V  64.0 V
 N1   250 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.6 Eddy Currents

If a conductor is subjected to a changing magnetic flux, a


current will flow. (This includes sheets of metal, etc.)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a metal plate that swings through a magnetic field.

pivot
X

An external magnetic
field into the page 
created by a magnet. 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

As the plate swings through the region of magnetic field,


some regions of the plate are entering the B-field (increasing
flux), and other regions of the plate are leaving the B-field
(decreasing flux). There will be induced currents in the
conductor called eddy currents.

The eddy currents dissipate energy (according to I2R); this


results in the damping of the amplitude of the metal sheet.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.7 Induced Electric Fields

When a stationary conductor sits in a changing magnetic


field it is an induced electric field that causes the charges
in the conductor to move.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.8 Mutual- and Self-Inductance

A variable current
I1 flows in coil 1.

Coil 1 Coil 2
I1 then induces a
current in coil 2.

The flux (21) through coil 2 due to coil 1 is N 2  21  I1.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Writing this as an equality, N 2  21  MI1


Where M is the mutual inductance. It depends only on
constants and geometrical factors. The unit of inductance is
the Henry (1H = 1Vs/A).

 21 I1
 2  N2  M
t t
The induced EMF in the coils will be:
12 I 2
 1   N1  M
t t

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Self-inductance occurs when a current carrying coil


induces an EMF in itself.

The definition of self-inductance (L) is N  LI .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 20.41): The current in a 0.080 Henry


solenoid increases from 20.0 mA to 160.0 mA in 7.0 s. Find
the average EMF in the solenoid during that time interval.

 I
  N  L
t t
 160 mA  20 mA 
 0.080 H  
 7.0 s 
 1.6  10 3 V

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An inductor stores energy in its magnetic field according to:

1 2
U  LI
2

The energy density in a magnetic field is:

1
uB  B2
20

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§20.9 LR Circuits

An inductor
and resistor
are connected
in series to a
battery.

As with an RC circuit, the current in the circuit varies


with time. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

I
The voltage drop across an inductor is given by  L  L .
t

When an inductor is “charging” (the energy stored is


increasing) the current in the circuit is:


I (t )  I f 1  e  t / 
Where  = L/R is the time constant for the circuit and If =
b/R maximum current in the circuit.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Applying Kirchhoff’s loop rule to the circuit gives the EMF


in the inductor as:
 t /
 L   b  IR   b e

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Plots of L(t) and I(t) for this LR circuit:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

 t /
For a “discharging” inductor, I (t )  I 0 e

where I0 is the current in


the inductor when t=0.

The LR circuit time constant  plays the same role as in


an RC circuit.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: A coil has an inductance of 0.15 H and a


resistance of 33.0 . The coil is connected to a 6.0 V ideal
battery. When the current reaches one-half the maximum
value:

(a) At what rate is the magnetic energy being stored in


the inductor?
 I max  Vmax 
Power  P  IV    
 2  2 
Vmax= emf of the battery (b) b
I max   0.18 Amps
= 6.0 Volts R

 I max  Vmax 
P    0.27 Watts
 2  2  Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) At what rate is energy being dissipated?

Energy is dissipated in the resistor at a rate

2
2  I max 
P I R  R
 2 
2
 0.18 Amps 
  33.0   0.27 Watts.
 2 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) What is the total power the battery supplies?

The battery must supply energy to the inductor and the


resistor. Part a and b calculate the rate at which energy
is delivered to the inductor and resistor respectively; the
battery must supply the sum of these: Pbattery = 0.54
Watts.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Motional EMF
•Faraday’s Law
•Lenz’s Law
•Transformers
•Eddy Currents
•Inductance and Inductors
•LR Circuits

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 21: Alternating Currents

•Sinusoidal Voltages and Currents


•Capacitors, Resistors, and Inductors in AC Circuits
•Series RLC Circuits
•Resonance
•AC to DC Conversion

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§21.1 Sinusoidal Currents and


Voltage

A power supply can be set to give an EMF of form:

 (t )   0 sin t
This EMF is time dependent, has an amplitude 0, and
varies with angular frequency .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

  2f
angular frequency in
frequency cycles/sec or Hz
in rads/sec

The current in a resistor is still given by Ohm’s Law:

 (t ) 0
I (t )   sin t  I 0 sin t
R R

The current has an amplitude of I0=0/R.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The instantaneous power dissipated in a resistor will be:

P  I (t )VR (t )
 I 0 sin t  0 sin t   I 0 0 sin 2 t

The power dissipated depends on t (where in the cycle the


current/voltage are).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What is the average power dissipated by a resistor in one


cycle?

The average value sin2t over one cycle is 1/2.

1
The average power is Pav  I 0 0 .
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What are the averages of V(t) and I(t) over one cycle?

The “problem” here is that the average value of sin t over


one complete cycle is zero! This is not a useful way to
characterize the quantities V(t) and I(t).

To fix this problem we use the root mean square (rms) as


the characteristic value over one cycle.

I0 0
I rms  and  rms 
2 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

In terms of rms quantities, the power dissipated by a resistor


can be written as:

1 I0  0
Pav  I 0 0 
2 2 2
2
2  rms
 I rms rms  I rms R
R

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 21.4): A circuit breaker trips when the


rms current exceeds 20.0 A. How many 100.0 W light bulbs
can run on this circuit without tripping the breaker? (The
voltage is 120 V rms.)

Each light bulb draws a current given by:

Pav  I rms rms


100 Watts  I rms 120 V 
I rms  0.83 Amps

If 20 amps is the maximum current, and 0.83 amps is the


current drawn per light bulb, then you can run 24 light bulbs
without tripping the breaker.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 21.10): A hair dryer has a power


rating of 1200 W at 120 V rms. Assume the hair dryer is the
only resistance in the circuit.

(a) What is the resistance of the heating element?

 2 rms
Pav 
R
2
1200 Watts 
120 V 
R
R  12 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the rms current drawn by the hair dryer?

Pav  I rms rms


1200 Watts  I rms 120 V 
I rms  10 Amps

(c) What is the maximum instantaneous power that the


resistance must withstand?
2 1
P  I 0 0 sin t  Pmax  I 0 0 Pav  I 0 0
2
Pmax = 2Pav = 2400 Watts
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§21.3-4 Capacitors, Resistors and


Inductors in AC circuits

For a capacitor: Q(t )  CVC (t )

Q(t )  VC (t ) 
In the circuit: I (t )   C 
t  t 

Slope of the
plot V(t) vs. t
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the
capacitor are 1/4 cycle out of phase. Here the current leads
the voltage by 1/4 cycle.

Here it is true that VCI. The equality is Vc = IXC where XC


is called capacitive reactance. (Think Ohm’s Law!)

1 Reactance has
XC  units of ohms.
C

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a resistor in an AC circuit, V (t )  I (t ) R.

The voltage and current will be in phase with each other.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For an inductor in an AC circuit:

 I (t ) 
VL  L 
 t  Slope of an
I(t) vs. t plot

Also, VL = IXL where the inductive reactance is:

X L  L

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the
inductor are 1/4 cycle out of phase. Here the current lags
the voltage by 1/4 cycle.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Plot of I(t), V(t), and P(t) for a capacitor.

The average power over one cycle is zero.


An ideal capacitor dissipates no energy. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A similar result is found for inductors; no energy is dissipated


by an ideal inductor.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§21.5 Series RLC Circuits

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Applying Kirchhoff’s loop rule:

 (t )  VL (t )  VR (t )  VC (t )  0

 (t )   0 sin t   
   
 VL sin  t    VR sin t   VC sin  t  
 2  2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To find the amplitude (0) and phase () of the total voltage
we add VL, VR, and VC together by using phasors.

y
2
 0  V  VL  VC 
R
2

2 2
VL  IR   IX L  IX C 
0 2
 I R  X L  X C 
2

X
 IZ
VR
VC
Z is called impedance.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

y
The phase angle between the
current in the circuit and the input
voltage is:
VL
0 VL  VC X L  X C
tan   
 VR R
VR X VR R
VC cos   
0 Z

>0 when XL> XC and the voltage leads the current


(shown above).
<0 when XL< XC and the voltage lags the current.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 21.79): In an RLC circuit these three


elements are connected in series: a resistor of 20.0 , a 35.0
mH inductor, and a 50.0 F capacitor. The AC source has an
rms voltage of 100.0 V and an angular frequency of 1.0103
rad/sec. Find…

(a) The reactances of the capacitor and the inductor.

X L  L  35.0 
1
XC   20.0 
C
(b) The impedance.

2
Z  R   X L  X C   25.0 
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) The rms current:

 rms  I rms Z
 rms 100.0 V
I rms    4.00 Amps
Z 25.0 

(d) The current amplitude:

I0
I rms 
2
I 0  2 I rms  5.66 Amps
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(e) The phase angle:

X L  X C 35  20
tan     0.75
R 20
  tan 1 0.75  0.644 rads (Or 37°)

(f) The rms voltages across each circuit element:

Vrms, R  I rms R  80.0 V


Vrms, L  I rms X L  140 V
Vrms,C  I rms X C  80.0 V
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(g) Does the current lead or lag the voltage?

Since XL>XC,  is a positive angle. The voltage leads


the current.

(h) Draw a phasor diagram.


y

VL
rms

VR X
VC Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The power dissipated by a resistor is:

Pav  I rms rms, R  I rms rms cos 

where cos is called the power factor (compare to slide 7;


Why is there a difference?).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§21.6 Resonance in RLC Circuits

A plot of I vs.
 for a series
RLC circuit
has a peak at
 = 0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The peak occurs at the resonant frequency for the circuit.

 
I 
Z R2  X L  X C 
2

The current will be a maximum when Z is a minimum. This


occurs when XL = XC (or when Z=R).

X L  XC
1
0 L 
0 C
1 This is the resonance
0 
LC frequency for the circuit.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

XL  XC
tan   0
At resonance: R
R
cos    1
R

The phase angle is 0; the voltage and the current are in


phase. The current in the circuit is a maximum as is the
power dissipated by the resistor.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§21.7 Converting AC to DC; Filters

A diode is a circuit element that allows current to pass


through in one direction, but not the other.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The plot shows the voltage drop across the


resistor. During half a cycle, it is zero.

Putting a capacitor in the circuit “smoothes” out VR,


producing a nearly constant voltage drop (a DC voltage).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A capacitor may be used as a filter.

Low-pass filter. When


XC << R ( is large) the
output voltage will be
small compared to the
input voltage.

When XC >> R ( is small), the output voltage will be


comparable to the input voltage.

This circuit will allow low frequency signals to pass through


while filtering out high frequency signals.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A high-pass filter. This will allow high frequency signals


to pass through while filtering out low frequency signals.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Difference Between Instantaneous, Average, and rms


Values
• Power Dissipation by R, L, and C
•Reactance for R, L, and C
•Impedance and Phase Angle
•Resonance in an RLC Circuit
•Diodes
•High- and Low-Pass Filters
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 22: Electromagnetic


Waves

•Production of EM waves
•Maxwell’s Equations
•Antennae
•The EM Spectrum
•Speed of EM Waves
•Energy Transport
•Polarization
•Doppler Effect

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.1 Production of EM Waves

A stationary charge produces an electric field.


A charge moving at constant speed produces electric
and magnetic fields.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A charge that is accelerated will produce variable electric


and magnetic fields. These are electromagnetic waves.

If the charge oscillates with a frequency f, then the


resulting EM wave will have a frequency f. If the charge
ceases to oscillate, then the EM wave is a pulse (a finite-
sized wave).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.2 Maxwell’s Equations

Gauss’s Law
Gauss’s Law for magnetism
Faraday’s Law
Ampère-Maxwell Law

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Gauss’s Law:

Electric fields (not induced) must begin on + charges and


end on – charges.

Gauss’s Law for magnetism:

There are no magnetic monopoles (a magnet must have at


least one north and one south pole).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Faraday’s Law:

A changing magnetic field creates an electric field.

Ampère-Maxwell Law

A current or a changing electric field creates a magnetic


field.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When Maxwell’s equations are combined, the solutions are


electric and magnetic fields that vary with position and time.
These are EM waves.

An electric field only wave cannot exist, nor can a magnetic


field only wave.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.3 Antennae

An electric field parallel to an antenna (electric dipole)


will “shake” electrons and produce an AC current.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An EM wave also has a


magnetic component. A
magnetic dipole antenna
can be oriented so that the
B-field passes into and out
of the plane of a loop,
inducing a current in the
loop.

The B-field of an EM wave is perpendicular to its E-field


and also the direction of travel.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 22.5): A dipole radio antenna has its


rod-shaped antenna oriented vertically. At a point due south
of the transmitter, what is the orientation of the emitted
wave’s B-field?
N
Looking down from
above the Electric W E
Dipole antenna

South of the transmitter, the E-field is directed into/out of


the page. The B-field is perpendicular to this direction and
also to the direction of travel (South). The B-field must be
east-west.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.4 The EM Spectrum

EM waves of any frequency can exist.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The EM Spectrum:

Energy increases with increasing frequency.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.5 Speed of Light

Maxwell was able to derive the speed of EM waves in


vacuum. EM waves do not need a medium to travel through.

1
c
 0 0
1

8.85 10 12

C 2 /Nm 2 4 10 7 Tm/A 
 3.00 108 m/s

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

In 1675 Ole Römer presented a calculation of the speed of


light. He used the time between eclipses of Jupiter’s
Gallilean Satellites to show that the speed of light was finite
and that its value was 2.25108 m/s.

Fizeau’s experiment of 1849 measured the value to be


about 3108 m/s. (done before Maxwell’s work)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When light travels though a material medium, its speed is


reduced.
c
v
n

where v is the speed of light in the medium and n is the


refractive index of the medium.

When a wave passes from one medium to another the


frequency stays the same, but the wavelength is changed.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A dispersive medium is one in which the index of refraction


depends on the wavelength of light.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.6 Properties of EM Waves

All EM waves in vacuum travel at the “speed of light” c.

Both the electric and magnetic fields have the same


oscillation frequency f.

The electric and magnetic fields oscillate in phase.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The fields are related by the relationship

E ( x, y, z , t )  cB( x, y, z , t )

EM waves are transverse. The fields oscillate in a direction


that is perpendicular to the wave’s direction of travel. The
fields are also perpendicular to each other.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The direction of propagation is given by E  B.

The wave carries one-half of its energy in its electric field


and one-half in its magnetic field.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

E z  Em sin ky  t   

phase
constant
The
amplitude wave angular
number frequency
2
k   2f


The wave speed is c  f  .
k
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 22.27): The electric field of an EM


wave is given by:
 
E z  Em sin  ky  t  
 6
Ex  0
Ey  0

(a) In what direction is this wave traveling?

The wave does not depend on the coordinates x or z; it


must travel parallel to the y-axis. The wave travels in the +y
direction.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Write expressions for the magnetic field of this wave.

must be in the +y-direction


EB (E is in the z-direction).

Therefore, B must be along the x-axis.

Bz  0, B y  0
 
Bx  Bm sin  ky  t  
 6
Em
with Bm 
c Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.7 Energy Transport by EM


Waves

Pav
The intensity of a wave is I .
A

This is a measure of how much energy strikes a surface of


area A every second for normal incidence.

The rays make a


90 angle with the
Surface surface.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Also,

E uavV uav Ax


I    uav c
At At At

where uav is the average energy density (energy per unit


volume) contained in the wave.

For EM waves:

2 1 2
u av   0 E rms  Brms
0
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 22.35): The intensity of the sunlight


that reaches Earth’s upper atmosphere is 1400 W/m2.

(a) What is the total average power output of the Sun,


assuming it to be an isotropic source?

Pav  IA  I 4R 2  

 4 1400 W/m 1.50  10 m 2
 11
 2

 4.0  10 26 W

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the intensity of sunlight incident on Mercury, which


is 5.81010 m from the Sun?

Pav Pav
I 
A 4r 2
4.0  10 26 W


4 5.8 1010 m 
2

 9460 W/m 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What if the EM waves strike at non-normal incidence?

Replace A with Acos.



Pav  IA cos 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.8 Polarization

A wave on a string is linearly polarized. The vibrations occur


in the same plane. The orientation of this plane determines
the polarization state of a wave.

For an EM wave, the direction of polarization is given by the


direction of the E-field.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The EM waves emitted by an antenna are polarized; the E-


field is always in the same direction.

A source of EM waves is unpolarized if the E-fields are in


random directions.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A polarizer will transmit linear polarized waves in the same


direction independent of the incoming wave.

It is only the
component of the
wave’s amplitude
parallel to the
transmission axis
that is transmitted.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If unpolarized light is incident on 1 polarizer, the intensity of


the light passing through is I= ½ I0.

If the incident wave is already polarized, then the transmitted


intensity is I=I0cos2 where  is the angle between the
incident wave’s direction of polarization and the transmission
axis of the polarizer. (Law of Malus)

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 22.40): Unpolarized light passes


through two polarizers in turn with axes at 45 to each other.
What is the fraction of the incident light intensity that is
transmitted?

After passing through the first polarizer, the intensity is ½


of its initial value. The wave is now linearly polarized.

Transmission axis
Direction of
linear of 2nd polarizer.
polarization 45

I 2  I1 cos 2 
1  2 1
  I 0  cos 45  I 0
2  4
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§22.9 The Doppler Effect


v
1
c
For EM waves, the Doppler shift formula is fo  f s
v
1
c

where fs is the frequency emitted by the source, fo is the


frequency received by the observer, v is the relative velocity
of the source and the observer, and c is the speed of light.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the source and observer are approaching each other, then


v is positive, and v is negative if they are receding.

When v/c<<1, the previous expression can be approximated


as:

 v
f o  f s 1  
 c

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 22.48): Light of wavelength 659.6 nm is


emitted by a star. The wavelength of this light as measured on
Earth is 661.1 nm. How fast is the star moving with respect to
the Earth? Is it moving toward Earth or away from it?

The wavelength shift is small (<<) so v<<c.

 v
f o  f s 1  
 c
v fo c / o s
 1   1   1  0.0023
c fs c / s o
v  6.8  105 m/s  680 km/s Star is receding.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Maxwell’s Equations
•EM Spectrum
•Properties of EM Waves
•Energy Transport by EM Waves
•Polarization
•Doppler Effect

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 23: Reflection and


Refraction of Light

•Huygens’s Principle
•Reflection
•Refraction
•Total Internal Reflection
•Polarization by Reflection
•Formation of Images
•Plane Mirrors
•Spherical Mirrors
•Thin Lenses
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.1 Huygens’s Principle

A set of points with equal phase is called a wavefront.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A ray points in the direction of wave propagation and is


perpendicular to the wavefronts. Or a ray is a line in the
direction along which light energy is flowing.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Huygens’s principle: At some time t, consider every point


on a wavefront as a source of a new spherical wave. These
wavelets move outward at the same speed as the original
wave. At a later time t+t, each wavelet has a radius vt,
where v is the speed of propagation of the wave. The
wavefront at t+t is a surface tangent to the wavelets.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Geometric optics is an approximation to the behavior of


light that applies when interference and diffraction are
negligible. In order for diffraction to be negligible, the sizes
of objects must be large compared to the wavelength of
light.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.2 Reflection of Light

When light is reflected from a smooth surface the rays


incident at a given angle are reflected at the same angle.
This is specular reflection.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Reflection from a rough surface is called diffuse reflection.

“Smooth” and “rough” are determined based on the


wavelength of the incident rays.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The angle of incidence equals the angle of reflection. The


incident ray, reflected ray, and normal all lie in the same
plane. The incident ray and reflected ray are on opposite
sides of the normal.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.3 Refraction of Light

When light rays pass from one medium to another they


change direction. This is called refraction.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Snell’s Law

n1 sin 1  n2 sin  2
where the subscripts refer
to the two different media.
The angles are measured
from the normal.

When going from high n to low n, the ray will bend away
from the normal.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The incident ray, transmitted ray, and normal all lie in the
same plane.

The incident and transmitted rays are on opposite sides of


the normal.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.11): Sunlight strikes the surface of


a lake. A diver sees the Sun at an angle of 42.0° with
respect to the vertical. What angle do the Sun’s rays in air
make with the vertical?

incident wave
1
n1 = 1.00; air
surface
n2 = 1.33; water
42° n1 sin 1  n2 sin  2
Transmitted
1.00sin 1  1.333sin 42
wave Normal sin 1  0.8920
1  63.1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.4 Total Internal Reflection

The angle of incidence for when the angle of refraction is


90° is called the critical angle.

n1 sin 1  n2 sin  2
n1 sin  c  n2 sin 90  n2
n2
sin  c 
n1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If the angle of incidence is greater than or equal to the


critical angle, then no wave is transmitted into the other
medium. The wave is completely reflected from the
boundary.

Total internal reflection can only occur when the incident


medium has a larger index of refraction than the second
medium.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.22): Calculate the critical angle


for sapphire surrounded by air.

2=90
n2 = 1.0; air Transmitted wave

n1 = 1.77; sapphire surface

1
n1 sin 1  n2 sin  2
incident wave
Normal 1.77 sin  c  1.00sin 90
sin  c  0.565
1  34.4
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.5 Polarization by Reflection

Brewster’s angle is the angle of incidence for which the


reflected light is completely polarized.

Light is totally polarized when the reflected ray and the


transmitted ray are perpendicular.

ni sin  i  nt sin  t
ni sin  B  nt sin 90   B   nt cos  B
nt
tan  B 
ni Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.32): (a) Sunlight reflected from


the still surface of a lake is totally polarized when the
incident light is at what angle with respect to the
horizontal?

nwater 1.33
tan  B    1.33
nair 1.00
 B  53.1
The angle is measured from the normal, so 90 - 53.1
= 36.9 is the angle from the horizontal.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) In what direction is the reflected light polarized?

It is polarized
perpendicular
to the plane of
incidence.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) Is any light incident at this angle transmitted into the


water? If so, at what angle below the horizontal does the
transmitted light travel?

From Snell’s Law: n1 sin 1  n2 sin  2


1.00sin 53.1  1.333sin  2
sin  2  0.6000
 2  36.9
The angle is measured from the normal, so 90 - 36.9
= 53.1 is the angle from the horizontal.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.6 Formation of Images

An image is real if light rays from a point on the object


converge to a corresponding point on the image.

A camera lens
forms a real image.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The light rays


appear to come
from behind the
mirror.

An image is virtual if the light


Your eye focuses rays from a point on the object
the diverging rays are directed as if they diverged
reflected by the from a point on the image, even
mirror. though the rays do not actually
pass through the image point.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.35): A defect in a diamond


appears to be 2.00 mm below the surface when viewed from
directly above that surface. How far beneath the surface is
the defect.

Air
n2 =1.00
2 2

Surface
Diamond y’
1 1
n1 = 2.419
y

Actual location
of defect
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The angles 1 and 2 are related by Snell’s Law:

n1 sin 1  n2 sin  2

The actual depth of the defect is y and it appears to be at a


depth of y’. These quantities are related by:

y tan  2  y tan 1

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Dividing the previous two expressions gives:

n1 y cos 1  n2 y cos  2

As long as you are directly above the defect and its image,
the angles 1 and 2 are nearly 0°. Rays from only a narrow
range of angles will enter your eye. The above expression
simplifies to:
n1 y  n2 y
y n2 (general result)

y n1 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The actual depth of the defect in the diamond is then

n1  2.419 
y y   2.00 mm   4.84 mm.
n2  1.00 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.7 Plane Mirrors


A point source and its image are at the same distance from
the mirror, but on opposite sides of the mirror.

Treat an extended
object as a set of
point sources.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.41): Entering a darkened room,


Gustav strikes a match in an attempt to see his
surroundings. At once he sees what looks like another
match about 4 m away from him. As it turns out, a mirror
hangs on one of the walls. How far is Gustav from the wall
with the mirror?

The image seems 4 m away, but the mirror is only 2 m


away since the rays will appear to come from a point 2 m
behind the mirror.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.8 Spherical Mirrors


Center of
vertex curvature

Principal
axis
The focal
point

A convex (or diverging) mirror curves


away from the observer.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A ray parallel to
the principle axis
is reflected, and it
appears to have
come from point
F, the focal point
of the mirror.

For a convex mirror, the focal point is on the axis and is


located a distance 0.5R behind the mirror, where R is the
radius of curvature.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Drawn in green, red, and blue are the principal rays.

1. A ray parallel to the principal axis is reflected as if it came


from the focal point. (green)
2. A ray along a radius is reflected back upon itself. (red)
3. A ray directed toward the focal point is reflected parallel to
the principal axis. (blue)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For the pencil in the previous figure, the image is upright,


virtual, smaller than the object, and closer to the mirror
than the object.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A concave (or converging) mirror


curves toward the observer.

Center of
curvature vertex

Principal
axis

The focal
point

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Drawn in green, red, and blue are the principal rays.

1. A ray parallel to the principal axis is reflected through the


focal point. (green)
2. A ray along a radius is reflected back upon itself. (red)
3. A ray along the direction from the focal point to the mirror is
reflected parallel to the principal axis. (blue)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

image size h
The magnification is defined as m  .
object size h

An inverted image has m<0 and an upright image has


m>0.

The expression for magnification can also be written as

q where p is the object distance and


m
p q is the image distance.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The mirror equation:

1 1 1 where f is the focal length of the mirror.


  f<0 when the focal point is behind the
p q f
mirror.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.46): An object 2.00 cm high is


placed 12.0 cm in front of a convex mirror with a radius of
curvature of 8.00 cm. Where is the image formed?

1 1 1
 
p q f

where p = 12.0 cm, f = -0.5R = -4.00 cm, and q is the


unknown image distance. Solving gives q = -3.00 cm. The
image is behind the mirror.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§23.9 Thin Lenses

A diverging lens will bend light away from the principle axis.

A converging lens will bend light toward the principal axis.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

h q
Magnification: m 
h p

1 1 1
The thin lens equation:  
p q f

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 23.64): A diverging lens has a


focal length -8.00 cm.

(a) What are the image distances for objects placed at


various distances from the lens? Is the image real or
virtual? Upright or inverted? Enlarged or diminished?

Object Image Real / Upright / Enlarged/


distance distance virtual? inverted? diminished
5 cm -3.08 cm Virtual upright Diminished
8 cm -4.00 cm Virtual upright Diminished
14 cm -5.09 cm Virtual upright Diminished
16 cm -5.33 cm Virtual upright Diminished
20 cm -5.71 cm Virtual upright Diminished

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) If the object is 4.00 cm high, what is the height of the


image?

Object Image Magnification Image height


distance distance
5 cm -3.08 cm 0.616 2.46 cm
8 cm -4.00 cm 0.500 2.00 cm
14 cm -5.09 cm 0.364 1.45 cm
16 cm -5.33 cm 0.333 1.33 cm
20 cm -5.71 cm 0.285 1.14 cm

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•The Laws of Reflection


•The Laws of Refraction
•Condition for Total Internal Reflection
•Condition for Total Polarization of Reflected Light
•Real/virtual Images
•Mirrors (plane & spherical)
•Thin Lenses

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 24: Optical Instruments

•Combinations of Lenses
•The Camera
•The Eye
•The Magnifier
•The Compound Microscope
•The Telescope

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§24.1 Combinations of Lenses

With lenses in combination, the image formed by one lens


is the object for the next lens.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The thin lens equation still applies.

1 1 1
 
p1 q1 f1
p is the object distance, q is the
1 1 1 image distance, f is the focal
 
p2 q2 f 2 length and s is the distance
between the lenses.
p2  s  q1

It is possible to have the object for the second lens be


virtual (p2<0); here the image formed by the first lens is
beyond the second lens.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The magnification of a combination of lenses is just the


product of the magnifications for the individual lenses.

mtotal  m1m2  mn

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 24.2): A converging and diverging


lens, separated by a distance of 30.0 cm, are used in
combination. The converging lens has f1 = 15.0 cm and the
diverging lens has an unknown focal length. An object is
placed at 20.0 cm in front of the converging lens; the final
image is virtual and is formed 12.0 cm before the diverging
lens. What is the focal length of the diverging lens?

1 1 1 Given: p1 = 20 cm; f1 = 15 cm.


 
p1 q1 f1 Find that q1 = 60 cm

p2  s  q1 Given: s = 30.0 cm. Find that


p2 = -30 cm.

1 1 1 Given: q2 = -12 cm and p2 = -30 cm.


 
p2 q2 f 2 Find that f2 = -8.6 cm.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§24.2 The Camera

A camera forms a real, inverted image. For far away


objects, the film must be placed one focal length from the
lens. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 24.17): A person on safari wants to


take a photograph of a hippopotamus from a distance of
75.0 m. The animal is 4.00 m long and its image is to be
1.20 cm long on the film. (a) What focal length lens should
be used?

width on film h q
m  
object width h p
h   1.2 cm 
q   p   75.0 m   22.5 cm
h  4.0 m 

1 1 1
Now use the thin lens equation  
p q f
f  22.4 cm
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What would be the size of the image if a lens of 50.0


mm focal length were used?
1 1 1 1 1 1
    
p q f q f p
q  50.0 mm

width on film h q
m  
object width h p
q  50.0 mm 
h   h    4.0 m   2.67 mm
p  75.0 m 

The object is 2.67 mm long (inverted). Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§24.3 The Eye

The lens is at a fixed distance from the retina (unlike in


some cameras where this is adjustable). The lens has a
variable focal length, which is adjusted to keep the image
distance (q) constant as the object distance (p) varies.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The near point is the closest distance from your eye that an
object can be seen clearly. For a normal eye this distance is
25 cm.

The far point is farthest distance from your eye that an


object can be seen clearly. For a normal eye this distance
is .

Refractive power of a lens is defined as:

1 where f is the focal length of


P the lens; typical units of P are
f
diopters (1D = 1 m-1).
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a near sighted (myopic) person, light rays converge


before they strike the retina.

A diverging lens is placed in the light path. This creates a


virtual image closer to your eye than the actual object is.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a far sighted (hyperopic) person, light rays converge after


they strike the retina.

A converging lens is placed in the light path. This creates a


virtual image farther from your eye than the actual object is.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 24.63): If Harry has a near point of


1.5 m, what focal length contact lenses does he require?

The near point refers to the closest distance an object can be


to see it clearly, in this case 1.5 m. A normal eye has a near
point of 25 cm. These corrective lenses must take an object
at 25 cm and form a virtual image at a distance of 1.5 m.

1 1 1 Given p = 25 cm; q = -1.5m.


 
p q f Here f = +30.0 cm

The refractive power 1 1


P   3.3 D (Diopter)
of these lenses is f 0.30 m
Harry is farsighted.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§24.4 The Magnifier

The farther an object is from your eye, the smaller it will


look.

For an object to look bigger the image of it formed on the


retina must be made bigger.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Using the triangles in the figure, the angular size  of an


object is:

size of object
tan    
object distance

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

 aided
The angular magnification is M .
 unaided

The largest angular size an object can have and still be


seen clearly is when it is placed at your near point.

size of object h
 unaided  
object distance N

Now the object is placed at the focal point of a converging


lens
size of object h
 aided  
object distance f Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

h
 aided f N
M  
 unaided h f
N

N is the near point for a person (typically 25 cm) and f is the


focal length of the lens used in the magnifier.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 24.34): An insect that is 5.00 mm


long is placed 10.0 cm from a converging lens with a focal
length of 12.0 cm.

(a) What is the position of the image?

1 1 1 Given: p = 10.0 cm and f = 12.0 cm.


 
p q f Find that q = -60.0 cm; on the same
side of the lens as the insect.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the size of the image?

h q
m 
h p
q   60 cm 
h   h   5.00 mm   30.0 mm
p  10 cm 

(c) Is the image upright or inverted?

Since h’>0, the image is upright.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(d) Is the image real or virtual?

Since q<0 (the image forms on the same side of the


lens as the object), the image is virtual.

(e) What is the angular magnification if the lens is close to


the eye?

 aided N 25 cm Object is at a
M    2.5 distance of p, not
 unaided p 10 cm f from the lens.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§24.5 The Compound Microscope

Two converging lenses


are used to produce a
highly magnified image.

The objective lens forms an


enlarged real image here.

The eyepiece is used


to view this image.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The eyepiece is used as a magnifier; the image formed by


the objective is placed at the focal point of the eyepiece.
The total magnification is the product of the individual
magnifications:

 L  N 
M total  mobjmeye    
 f  f 
 obj  eye 

where L = “tube length” = q0 - f0; N = near point distance;


and fobj & feye are focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece
respectively.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 24.42): A microscope has an objective


lens of focal length 5.00 mm. The objective forms an image
16.5 cm from the lens. The focal length of the eyepiece is
2.80 cm.

(a) What is the distance between the lenses?

Using figure 24.16, the distance between the lenses


is d = feye + qo = 2.80 cm + 16.5 cm = 19.3 cm.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the angular magnification? The near point is


25.0 cm.
 L  N 
M total  mobjmeye    
 f  f 
 obj  eye 
 qo  f obj  N 
     286
 f  f 
 obj  eye 

(c) How far from the objective should the object be placed?

1 1 1 Given: q = 16.5 cm and f = 0.5 cm.


 
p q f Find that p = 0.52 cm.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§24.6 The Telescope

A telescope is a combination of lenses and/or mirrors used


to collect a large amount of light and bring it to a focus.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A refracting telescope (or refractor) uses lens.

The barrel (or The angular


tube) length is magnification is

L  f obj  f eye .  eye f obj


M  .
 obj f eye
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A reflecting telescope uses mirrors (and lenses).

Light path of a Cassegrain telescope:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 24.49): A refracting telescope is used


to view the moon (diameter of 3474 km & distance from Earth
384,500 km). The focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece
are +2.40 m and +16.0 cm, respectively.

(a) What should be the distance between the lenses?

L  f obj  f eye  2.56 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the diameter of the image produced by the


objective?

image size h q
m  
object size h p
q  2.40 m 
h   h   3474 m   2.17 cm
p  384,500 km 

(c) What is the angular magnification?

f obj 2.40 m
M    15
f eye 0.16 m
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Combinations of Lens
•The Camera
•The Eye
•The Magnifier
•The Compound Microscope
•The Telescope

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 25: Interference and


Diffraction

•Constructive and Destructive Interference


•The Michelson Interferometer
•Thin Films
•Young’s Double Slit Experiment
•Gratings
•Diffraction
•Resolution of Optical Instruments

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§25.1 Constructive and Destructive


Interference

Two waves are coherent if they maintain a fixed phase


relationship (waves from the same source). Two waves
are incoherent otherwise (waves from different sources).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Constructive interference occurs when two waves are in


phase. To be in phase, the points on the wave must have
=(2)m, where m is an integer.

When coherent waves are in phase, the resulting amplitude


is just the sum of the individual amplitudes. The energy
content of a wave depends on A2. Thus, IA2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The resulting amplitude and intensity are:

A  A1  A2
I  I 1  I 2  2 I1 I 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Destructive interference occurs when two waves are a half


cycle out of phase. To be out of phase the points on the
wave must have =(2)(m+½), where m is an integer.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The resulting amplitude and intensity are:

A  A1  A2
I  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Coherent waves can become out of phase if they travel


different distances to the point of observation.

S1

d

S2 This represents the extra path length


(l) that the wave from S2 must
travel to reach point P.

l  d sin 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

When both waves travel in the same medium the


interference conditions are:

For constructive interference l  m


where m = an integer.

 1
For destructive interference l   m  
 2
where m = an integer.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.1): A 60.0 kHz transmitter sends


an EM wave to a receiver 21 km away. The signal also
travels to the receiver by another path where it reflects from
a helicopter. Assume that there is a 180 phase shift when
the wave is reflected.

(a) What is the


wavelength of
this EM wave?

c 3.0 105 km/sec


  3
 5.0 km
f 60  10 Hz
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Will this situation give constructive interference,


destructive inference, or something in between?

The path length difference is l = 10 km = 2, a whole


number of wavelengths. Since there is also a 180 phase
shift there will be destructive interference.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§25.2 Michelson Interferometer

In the Michelson interferometer, a beam of coherent light is


incident on a beam splitter. Half of the light is transmitted
to mirror M1 and half is reflected to mirror M2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The beams of light are reflected by the mirrors, combined


together, and observed on the screen.

If the arms are of different lengths, a phase difference


between the beams can be introduced.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.12): A Michelson interferometer is


adjusted so that a bright fringe appears on the screen. As
one of the mirrors is moved 25.8 m, 92 bright fringes are
counted on the screen. What is the wavelength of the light
used in the interferometer?

Moving the mirror a distance d introduces a path length


difference of 2d. The number of bright fringes (N)
corresponds to the number of wavelengths in the extra
path length.

N  2 d
2d
  0.561 m
N
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§25.3 Thin Films

When an incident light ray reflects from a boundary with a


higher index of refraction, the reflected wave is inverted (a
180° phase shift is introduced).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A light ray can be reflected many times within a medium.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.18): A thin film of oil (n=1.50) of


thickness 0.40 m is spread over a puddle of water (n=1.33).
For which wavelength in the visible spectrum do you expect
constructive interference for reflection at normal incidence?

Water Oil Air


Consider the first two
reflected rays. r1 is
from the air-oil
boundary and r2 is from
Incident
the oil-water boundary.
wave

r1 has a 180 phase shift (noil >nair),


but r2 does not (noil<nwater).
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

To get constructive interference, the reflected waves must


be in phase. For this situation, this means that the wave
that travels in oil must travel an extra path equal to multiples
of half the wavelength of light in oil.

The extra path distance traveled is 2d, where d is the


thickness of the film. The condition for constructive
interference here is:
 1  1  air 
2d   m  oil   m   
 2  2  noil 
2dnoil
 air  Only the wavelengths that
 1
m   satisfy this condition will have
 2  constructive interference.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Make a table:

m air(m)
0 2.40
1 0.80
2 0.48 All of these wavelengths will show
constructive interference, but it is
3 0.34 only this one that is in the visible
portion of the spectrum.
4 0.27

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§25.4 Young’s Double-Slit


Experiment

Place a source of coherent light


behind a mask that has two vertical
slits cut into it. The slits are L tall,
their centers are separated by d,
and their widths are a.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The slits become sources of


waves that, as they travel
outward, can interfere with
each other.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The pattern seen on the screen

There are
alternating
bright/dark
spots.

An
intensity
trace

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The bright spots occur where there is constructive


interference:
l  d sin   m
where m is an integer
and is called the “order”.

The dark spots occur where there is destructive interference:

 1
l  d sin    m  
 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.28): Show that the interference


fringes in a double-slit experiment are equally spaced on a
distant screen near the center of the interference pattern.

The condition for constructive


interference isL

l  d sin   m
m
sin  
d

From the geometry of the


problem, h
tan  
D
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The screen is far away compared to the distance between


the slits (D>>d) so tan  sin  . Here,
m h
sin     and tan    
d D
m h
 
d D
mD
h
d
The distance between two adjacent minima is:

D D
h2  h1  m2  m1  
d d
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§25.5 Gratings

A grating has a large


number of evenly spaced,
parallel slits cut into it.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.38): Red light with =650 nm can


be seen in three orders in a particular grating. About how
many rulings per cm does this grating have?

For each of the maxima d sin   m

d sin  0  0
d sin 1  1
d sin  2  2
d sin  3  3 Third order is observed.

d sin  4  4 This order is not


observed.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Since the m = 4 case is not observed, it must be that


sin4>1. We can then assume that 390°. This gives

d  3  1.95  10 6 m

1
and N   510,000 lines/m  5100 lines/cm.
d

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§25.6-7 Diffraction

Using Huygens’s principle: every


point on a wave front is a source
of wavelets; light will spread out
when it passes through a narrow
slit.

Diffraction is appreciable only when


the slit width is nearly the same size
or smaller than the wavelength.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The
intensity
pattern on
the screen.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The minima occur when: a sin   m

where m = 1, 2,…


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.49): Light from a red laser passes


through a single slit to form a diffraction pattern on a distant
screen. If the width of the slit is increased by a factor of two,
what happens to the width of the central maximum on the
screen?
The central maximum occurs between =0 and  as
determined by the location of the 1st minimum in the
diffraction pattern:
a sin   m Let m =+1 and assume
that  is small.


a
From the previous picture,  only determines the half-width
of the maximum. If a is doubled, the width of the
maximum is halved. 31 Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.8 Resolution of Optical


Instruments

The effect of diffraction is to spread light out. When viewing


two distant objects, it is possible that their light is spread out
to where the images of each object overlap. The objects
become indistinguishable.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a circular aperture, the


Rayleigh criterion is: 

a sin   1.22

where a is the aperture size of your instrument,  is


the wavelength of light used to make the observation,
and  is the angular separation between the two
observed bodies.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To resolve a pair of objects, the


angular separation between
a sin   1.22 them must be greater than the
value of .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 25.56): The radio telescope at


Arecibo, Puerto Rico, has a reflecting spherical bowl of 305 m
diameter. Radio signals can be received and emitted at
various frequencies at the focal point of the reflecting bowl.
At a frequency of 300 MHz, what is the angle between two
stars that can barely be resolved?

a sin   1.22

sin  
1.22

1.223 .0  10 8
m/s
300  10 Hz
 6

a 300 m
sin   4.110 3
  0.23 degrees
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Conditions for Constructive/Cestructive Interference


•Thin Films
•Young’s Experiment
•Gratings
•Diffraction
•Rayleigh Criterion

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 26: Relativity

•The Postulates of Special Relativity


•Simultaneity
•Time Dilation
•Length Contraction
•Relativistic Velocity Addition
•Relativistic Momentum
•Relativistic Rest Mass Energy, Kinetic Energy, and Total Energy

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.1 Postulates of Relativity

Postulate 1: The laws of physics are the same in all


inertial reference frames (the principle of relativity).

An inertial reference frame is one in which no


accelerations are observed in the absence of external
forces. (Recall Newton’s first law).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Scientists in the 19th century believed that light was a


vibration in an invisible medium called the ether.

The Michelson-Morley experiment found that there was no


observable change in the speed of light due to the Earth’s
motion around the Sun. The conclusion was that the ether
did not exist.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Postulate 2: The speed of light in vacuum is the same in


all inertial reference frames. The value is independent of
the motion of the source of light or of the observer.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

What follows does not show that Newtonian physics is


wrong; it is just not complete. Newtonian physics breaks
down at speeds near c; this is where special relativity is
needed. All of the familiar relationships from Newtonian
physics are contained within special relativity in the limit of
low speeds. This is known as the correspondence
principle.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.2 Simultaneity and Ideal


Observers

The location of an event can be specified by four


coordinates: the three spatial coordinates (x,y,z) and a time
coordinate t. Taken together (x,y,z,t) are the four
coordinates of space-time.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a high speed train with AC=BC & A’C’=B’C’. The


marks ACB are on a stationary train platform and the marks
A’C’B’ are on the moving train.

v A’ C’ B’

A C B

At t=0: AA’, BB’, and CC’ are lined up. At this instant two
lightning bolts strike at AA’ and BB’.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An observer standing at point C (on the platform) will see


both strikes simultaneously.

The observer at C’ (on the train) will see the strike at AA’ first
followed by the strike at BB’.

The observers do not agree on what


happened, but both are correct.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

This experiment shows that events that are simultaneous in


one frame (the platform) are not simultaneous in another
frame (the train).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.3 Time Dilation


Consider a light clock. A light pulse reflects back and forth
between two mirrors. One complete trip can be considered
one “tick” on the clock.

Mirror The time interval for a round


trip by the light pulse is
L Light pulse

Mirror d 2L
t0   .
v c

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

As long as an observer is stationary with respect to the


clock, he will measure a time interval of t0 between clock
ticks. Now put the light clock on a moving train. What does
a stationary observer outside the train see?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The motion of the train is to the right with speed v.

The light pulse appears to have the path shown below. How
long does it take the light pulse to return to the bottom
mirror?

2
1 2
L 2 L   vt 
d 2 
t  
c c
vt
d 2L
Know t0  
v c
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

t0
Eliminating L gives t   t0 .
2
v
1  
c

v 1
Let,   and   (Lorentz Gamma factor)
c 1  2

The person outside the train will measure a longer


time interval between ticks compared to the observer
in the train.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The relative motion between the observers (train and


outside the train) changes the rate at which time passes.
The effect is known as time dilation.

Moving clocks run slower.

The quantity t0 is known as the proper time. This is time


interval between two events that occur in the same place.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.6): An unstable particle called


the pion has a mean lifetime of 25 ns in its own frame. A
beam of pions travels through the laboratory at a speed of
0.60c. (a) What is the mean lifetime of the pion as
measured in the laboratory?

Given: t0 = 25 ns and v = 0.60c (=0.60)

1 1
 2

2
 1.250
1  1  0.60

t  t0  1.250 25 ns   31 ns


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) How far does a pion travel (as measured by laboratory


observers) during this time?

d  vt  0.6c 31 ns   5.6 m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.4 Length Contraction

To measure the length of an object, its ends must be located


simultaneously. The proper length is measured when an
object is at rest relative to you.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A person on a train platform will measure the length of the


platform to be L0. A moving object will pass by the platform
in a time t so L0 = vt (note: t is not the proper time).

A person riding on a train will measure the length of the


platform to be L = vt0 (this person measures the proper
time).
L0 vt t
  
L vt0 t0
L0
or L 

where L0 is the proper length.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The two observers measure different lengths for the platform.

Moving meter sticks are shorter.

This effect is known as length contraction and only applies


to lengths parallel to the direction of motion.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.15): A cosmic ray particle travels


directly over a football field from one goal line to the other, at
a speed of 0.50c. (a) If the length of the field between goal
lines is 91.5 m, what is the length measured in the rest
frame of the particle?

Given: L0 = 91.5 m and v = 0.50c (=0.50)

1 1
 2

2
 1.155
1  1  0.50

L0
91.5 m
L   79 m.
 1.155
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) How long does it take the particle to go from one goal
line to the other according to earth observers?

L0 91.5
t    6.110 7 s
v 0.50c

(c) How long does it take in the rest frame of the particle?

L 79 m 7
t0    5.3 10 s
v 0.50c

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.17): Two spaceships are moving


directly toward each other with a relative velocity of 0.90c. If
an astronaut measures the length of his own spaceship to
be 30.0 m, how long is the spaceship as measured by an
astronaut in the other ship?

Given: L0 = 30.0 m and v = 0.90c (=0.90)

1 1
 2

2
 2.294
1  1  0.90

L0
30.0m
L   13 m.
 2.294
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.5 Velocities in Different


Reference Frames

What is the velocity of the probe as measured by Abe?


According to Galilean relativity, it is vPA= vPB+vBA.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Once the speeds get large enough, the relativistic velocity


transformation formula must be used.

vPB  vBA
vPA 
vPB vBA
1
c2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.25): The rogue starship, Galaxa,


is being chased by the battlecruiser, Millenia. The Millenia is
catching up to the Galaxa at a rate of 0.55c when the
captain of the Millenia decides it is time to fire a missile.
First the captain shines a laser range finder to determine the
distance to the Galaxa, and then he fires a missile that is
moving at a speed of 0.45c with respect to Millenia. What
speed does the Galaxa measure for (a) the laser beam and
(b) the missile as they both approach the starship?

The laser beam will be measured to have speed c.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The velocity of Millenia relative to Galaxa is vMG=0.55c.


The velocity of the missile relative to Millenia is vmG = 0.45c.
The velocity of the missile relative to Galaxa is

vmM  vMG 0.45c  0.55c


vmG    0.802c.
1
vmM vMG
1
0.45c 0.55c 
c 2
c2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.6 Relativistic Momentum

p  mv

Note: it is true that p =


Ft, but Fma.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example: Show that the expression for relativistic momentum


reduces to its classical form when v<<c.

When v<<c, <<1

 1 
p  mv   mv
 1  2 
 
  1 2 1 2
 1      mv  mv   mv
  2  2
3
v 1 v
 mc   mc 
c 2 c
 mv To first order in v/c
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.36): A body has a mass of


12.6 kg and a speed of 0.87c. (a) What is the magnitude
of the momentum?

Given: m = 12.6 kg and v = 0.87c (=0.87)

1 1
 2

2
 2.028
1  1  0.87

p  mv
 2.02812.6 kg 0.87c   6.7  10 kg m/s. 9

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) If a constant force of 424.6 N acts in the direction


opposite to the body’s motion, how long must the force act
to bring the body to rest?

p 6.7 109 kg m/s


t  
F 424.6 N
7
 6.58 10 s  0.50 years

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.7 Mass and Energy

The rest mass energy of a particle is its energy measured


in its rest frame.

E0  mc 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

1 eV (electron volt) is the change in energy that a charge


e (the fundamental unit of charge) experiences when
accelerated through a 1 volt potential difference.

W  qV  e 1 Volt  1 eV

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A proton has m=1.6710-27 kg; its rest mass energy is


2
E0  mc
 938 MeV
 0.938 GeV
The mass of the proton can be written as 938 MeV/c2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A quantity is conserved if its value is unchanged in a given


reference frame.

A quantity is invariant if its value is the same in all reference


frames.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§26.8 Relativistic Kinetic Energy

 
K    1 mc 2
Kinetic energy

E  E0  K
 mc    1mc
2 2
Total energy
2
 mc
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example:
Show that the expression for relativistic kinetic energy
reduces to its classical form when v<<c.
When v<<c, <<1

 1  2
KE    1mc    1mc 2
 1  2 
 
  1 2  2 1 2 2 1 2
 1       1mc   mc  mv .
  2  2 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The relationship between relativistic momentum and total


energy is

2

E   pc   mc
2
.
2 2

2
 pc   K 2  2KE0
Other useful relationships are
v pc
 .
c E
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.48): When an electron travels at


0.60c, what is its total energy in MeV?

Given: v = 0.60c (=0.60)

1 1
 2

2
 1.150
1  1  0.60

E  mc 2

 1.250  0.511 MeV/c 2 c 2  0.65 MeV. 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 26.53): An electron has a total


energy of 6.5 MeV. (a) What is its momentum (in MeV/c)?

The energy-momentum relationship is E   pc   mc 2 2


 .
2 2

Solving for p:

pc  E  mc 2
 
2 2

2 2
 6.5 MeV   0.511 MeV   6.5 MeV
p  6.5 MeV/c
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the value of  for this electron?

E 6.5 MeV
 2  12.7
mc 2 2
0.511 MeV/c c  
(c) What is the kinetic energy of this electron?

K    1mc 2

 11.7  0.511 MeV/c 2 c 2  6.0 MeV 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary
•The Postulates of Relativity
•Simultaneity
•Time Dilation (moving clocks run slower)
•Length Contraction (moving meter sticks are shorter)
•Addition of Relativistic Velocities
•Relativistic Momentum
•Rest Mass Energy
•Relativistic Kinetic Energy
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 27: Early Quantum


Physics and the Photon

•Blackbody Radiation
•The Photoelectric Effect
•X-ray Production
•Compton Scattering
•Early Models of the Atom
•The Bohr Model for the Hydrogen Atom
•Pair Production/Annihilation

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.1 Quantization

A quantity is quantized if its possible values are limited to a


discrete set.

An example from classical physics is the allowed


frequencies of standing waves on a stretched string. Only
integer multiples of the fundamental frequency produce
standing waves.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.2 Blackbody Radiation

A blackbody emits a
continuous spectrum
of radiation. The
spectrum is
determined only by
the temperature of
the blackbody.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

To correctly explain the shape of the blackbody spectrum


Planck proposed that the energy absorbed or emitted by
oscillating charges came in discrete bundles called quanta.
The energy of the quanta are

where h=6.62610-34 J s is
E0  hf called Planck’s constant.

The quantum of EM radiation is the photon.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.3 The Photoelectric Effect

Under certain circumstances EM radiation incident on a


metal will eject electrons from the metal. This is the
photoelectric effect.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Experiments show:
1. Brighter light causes more electrons to be ejected, but
not with more kinetic energy.
2. The maximum KE of ejected electrons depends on the
frequency of the incident light.
3. The frequency of the incident light must exceed a certain
threshold, otherwise no electrons are ejected.
4. Electrons are ejected with no observed time delay
regardless of the intensity of the incident light.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The wave theory of light says EM waves carry energy. The


energy is absorbed by electrons in the metal target which
are then ejected when they accumulate enough energy to
escape. However the wave theory is unable to completely
explain the photoelectric effect. Einstein proposed a particle
theory of light.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Observation 1

Wave theory predicts a more intense beam of light, having


more energy, should cause more electrons to be emitted
and they should have more kinetic energy.

Particle theory predicts a more intense beam of light to have


more photons so more electrons should be emitted, but
since the energy of a photon does not change with beam
intensity, the kinetic energy of the ejected electrons should
not change.

The particle theory is consistent with observation 1.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Observation 2

Wave theory cannot explain the frequency dependence of


the maximum kinetic energy.

Particle theory predicts the maximum kinetic energy of the


ejected electrons to show a dependence on the frequency
of the incident light. Each electron in the metal absorbs a
whole photon: some of the energy is used to eject the
electron and the rest goes into the KE of the electron.

The particle theory is consistent with observation 2.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The maximum KE of an ejected electron is

KEmax  hf  

where  is called the work function and is the energy


needed to break the bond between the electron and the
metal.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Observation 3

Wave theory can offer no explanation.

Particle theory predicts a threshold frequency is needed.


Only the incident photons with f>fthreshold will have enough
energy to free the electron from the metal.

The particle theory is consistent with observation 3.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The electron is ejected from the metal when the energy


supplied by the photon exactly equals the work function.
This defines the threshold frequency.

hf threshold    0

f threshold 
h

Here it is often convenient to use h = 4.13610-15 eV s.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Observation 4

Wave theory predicts that if the intensity of the light is low,


then it will take some time before an electron absorbs
enough energy to be ejected from the metal.

Particle theory predicts a low intensity light beam will just


have a low number of photons, but as long as f>fthreshold an
electron that absorbs a whole photon will be ejected; no
time delay should be observed.

The particle theory is consistent with observation 4.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The particle theory of light is needed to explain the


photoelectric effect (and Compton scattering and pair
production). A wave theory of light is needed to explain
interference patterns. Both are correct (wave-particle
duality).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.1): A 200 W infrared laser emits


photons with a wavelength of 2.010-6 m while a 200 W
ultraviolet laser emits photons with a wavelength of
7.010-8 m. (a) Which has greater energy, a single infrared
photon or a single ultraviolet photon?

hc The UV photon has the greater


E  hf  energy; its wavelength is smallest.

(b) What is the energy of a single infrared photon and
the energy of a single ultraviolet photon?
hc
EUV   2.8  10 18 J  18 eV
UV
hc
EIR   9.9  10  20 J  0.62 eV
IR Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) How many photons of each kind are emitted per


second?

energy emitted/sec
number of photons emitted per second 
energy/photon

For both lasers the energy emitted per second is 200 J.


The UV laser emits 7.01019 photons/sec and the IR
laser emits 2.0 1021 photons per second.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.4): The photoelectric threshold


frequency of silver is 1.041015 Hz. What is the minimum
energy required to remove an electron from silver?

KEmax  hf threshold    0
  hf threshold
 
 6.626  10 34 Js 1.04  1015 Hz 
19
 6.89  10 J  4.30 eV

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.11): Two different monochromatic


light sources, one yellow (580 nm) and one violet (425 nm),
are used in a photoelectric effect experiment. The metal
surface has a photoelectric threshold frequency of
6.201014 Hz. (a) Are both sources able to eject
photoelectrons from the metal? Explain.

The frequency of each source is


c
f yellow   5.17 1014 Hz
yellow
c
f violet   7.06 1014 Hz.
violet
Only the violet light is above the threshold frequency.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) How much energy is required to eject an electron


from the metal?

KEmax  hf threshold    0
  hf threshold
 
 6.626  10 34 Js 6.20 1014 Hz 
19
 4.1110 J  2.56 eV

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.4 X-ray Production

When high energy electrons impact a target x-ray photons


can be emitted as the electrons are slowed. This process is
called bremsstrahlung (German for breaking radiation).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

There is a continuous spectrum of radiation emitted up to a


cutoff frequency.

The spikes in the


spectrum are called
characteristic x-rays.
These peaks depend
on the target material.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.5 Compton Scattering

Before Collision After Collision

y Photon
(E1, p1)


x 
Photon Free
(E0, p0) electron
at rest
Free
electron
(K, p)
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Conserve momentum and energy during the collision:

pi  p f
x : p0  p1 cos   p cos 
y : 0  p1 sin   p sin 

Ei  E f
E0  me c 2  E1  K  me c 2
 K  E0  E1  c( p0  p1 )

E=pc for a photon Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Manipulating the previous expressions gives

h
1  0  1  cos  
 is the me c
Compton   c 1  cos  .
shift.

h
c   2.426 pm The Compton
me c wavelength

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.21): A photon is incident on an


electron at rest. The scattered photon has a wavelength of
2.81 pm and moves at an angle of 29.5 with respect to the
direction of the incident photon. (a) What is the wavelength
of the incident photon?

The Compton shift is   c 1 cos  


 2.43 pm 1  cos 29.5
 0.315 pm.
The incident wavelength is
0  1  
 2.81 pm  0.314 pm  2.50 pm.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the final kinetic energy of the electron?

The final kinetic energy of the electron is equal


to the change in the photon’s energy.

K  c( p0  p1 )
 h h 1 1
 c    hc  
 0 1   0 1 
15
 8.77  10 J  55 keV
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.6 Spectroscopy and Early


Models of the Atom

A hot, solid object will emit a continuous spectrum. A hot gas


will show an emission or line spectrum (dark background
with bright lines). Each element has its own unique set of
spectral lines.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Examples of emission spectra:

An absorption spectrum (bright background with dark lines)


is seen if a hot source is viewed though a gas.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Before the structure of the atom was known, an empirical


result was derived for the wavelengths of the spectral lines
of hydrogen in the visible portion of the spectrum (the
Balmer series).

1 1 1 
 R  2 
 4 n 

Where R = 1.097107, m-1 is the Rydberg constant and n


3.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The Thomson model of the atom


had a volume of positive charge with
the negatively charged electrons
embedded within the volume.

Scattering experiments by Rutherford led to the conclusion


that an atom had a very small nucleus of positive charge
(10-5 times the size of the atom containing nearly all of the
mass) that was surrounded by the electrons.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

It was thought that the electrons in their orbits should radiate


(they are accelerated) causing the electron’s orbit to decay,
implying that atoms are not stable. This is obviously false.
Any model of the atom must also explain the line spectra of
the elements.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.7 The Bohr Model of the


Hydrogen Atom

The Bohr model assumes:

The electron is allowed to be in only one of a discrete


set of states called stationary states. The electron
orbits have quantized radii, energy, and angular
momentum.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Newtonian physics applies to an electron in a stationary


state.

The electron can transition between one stationary state


and another provided it can absorb/emit a photon of
energy equal to the energy difference between the
states. E=hf.

The stationary states have quantized angular momentum


in the amount

h
Ln  n  n; n is an integer.
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The allowed radii are

n 2 2 2
rn  2
 n a0
me ke

where a0 = 52.9 pm is
the Bohr radius.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

me k 2 e 4 E1
The energy levels are given by En   2 2
 2
2n  n

where E1=-13.6 eV is the energy of the ground state, the


lowest possible energy of the electron. When n>1 the
electron is in an excited state. The quantity n is an integer
and is the principal quantum number.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Energy level
diagram for
hydrogen

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The energy of a photon emitted (absorbed) by an electron


during a transition is

hc  1 1 
E  Ei  E f   E1  2  2 
 n n 
 f i 
1 E1  1 1 
  2
 hc  n f ni 
2

E1
where   1.097 10 7 m 1  R is the Rydberg constant.
hc

When nf=2, the above result reduces to the Balmer formula.


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The Bohr model correctly predicted the wavelengths of the


spectral lines of hydrogen in the visible. There are several
problems with the Bohr model.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Bohr’s model, while successful at predicting the spectrum of


hydrogen, fails at predicting the spectra of most other
elements. Only hydrogenic atoms (atoms that only have one
electron; Li2+ for example) can have their spectra computed
using the Bohr model.

n22 n 2 a0
The allowed radii are rn  2
 .
me kZe Z

me k 2 Z 2 e 4 Z 2 E1H
The energy levels are En   2 2

2n  n2

where Z is the atomic number of


the atom and E1H = -13.6 eV .
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.34): Find the Bohr radius of


doubly ionized lithium (Li2+).

n 2 a0
What is r1? rn 
Z

12 a0 1
r1   a0  17.6 pm
3 3

The inner most energy level is closer to the


nucleus than in an H atom.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.35): Find the energy in eV


required to remove the remaining electron from a doubly
ionized lithium (Li2+) atom.
Z 2 E1H
En  2
n

The electron is in the ground state (n=1), so

32 E1H
E1  2  9 E1H  122 eV.
1

To remove the electron will require the electron be


given 122 eV of energy.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.51): A hydrogen atom has an


electron in the n=5 level. (a) If the electron returns to the
ground state, what is the minimum number of photons that
can be emitted?

One photon; the electron may transition from


the n = 5 level to the n = 1 level.

(b) What is the maximum number that might be emitted?

Four photons; the electron may cascade


from n = 5 to 4 to 3 to 2 to n = 1.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§27.8 Pair Annihilation and Pair


Production

A photon can interact with an atomic nucleus and change


itself into an electron-positron pair (or some particle-
antiparticle pair.) A positron is an antielectron. The nucleus
is needed to ensure that momentum is conserved.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The energy of the photon must be at least 2mec2. If E >


2mec2 , then the additional energy goes into the kinetic
energy of the electron-positron pair. This is pair production.

 
The inverse process is e  e  2 photons.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


44
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The process of pair production created protons, neutrons,


and electrons in the earliest moments after the Big Bang.

To have enough energy, the photons must be “hot” enough.


Electrons need T~1010 K and for protons/neutrons T~1013 K.
The early Universe must have been much hotter than it is
today.

Pair production creates equal amounts of matter and


antimatter. Where in the Universe is all of the antimatter?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


45
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 27.60): A muon and an antimuon,


each with mass 207 times greater than an electron, were at
rest when they annihilated and produced two photons of
equal energy. What is the wavelength of each of the
photons?

2
For an electron-positron pair 2me c  1.022 MeV.

For a muon-antimuon pair 2 m c 2



 207 2me c 2  212 MeV. 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
46
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The created photons each have 106 MeV of energy.


Their wavelengths are

hc 1240 eV nm
  6
E 106  10 eV
 1.17  10 5 nm  1.17  10 14 m.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


47
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Quantization
•The Photoelectric Effect These processes

•Compton Scattering
•Pair Production/Annihilation
} are explained by
light behaving like
a particle, not as a
wave.
•Spectroscopy
•Bohr Model for Hydrogen

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


48
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 28: Quantum Physics


•Wave-Particle Duality
•Matter Waves
•The Electron Microscope
•The Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle
•Wave Functions for a Confined Particle
•The Hydrogen Atom
•The Pauli Exclusion Principle
•Electron Energy Levels in a Solid
•The Laser
•Quantum Mechanical Tunneling
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.1 The Wave-Particle Duality

Interference and diffraction experiments show that light


behaves like a wave. The photoelectric effect, the Compton
effect, and pair production demonstrate that light behaves
like a particle.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a double slit


experiment in which only one
photon at a time leaves the
light source. After a long time,
the screen will show a typical
interference pattern (c).

Even though there is only one


photon emitted at a time, we
cannot determine which slit it
will pass through nor where it
will land on the screen.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The intensity pattern on the screen is representative of the


probability that a photon will land in a given location
(higher intensity = higher probability).

For an EM wave IE2, so E2 probability of a photon


striking the screen at a given location. For an EM, wave E
represents the wave function.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.2 Matter Waves

If a wave (EM radiation) can behave like a particle, might a


particle act like a wave?

The answer is yes. If a beam of electrons with appropriate


momentum is incident on a sample of material, a
diffraction pattern will be evident.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

On the right is a diffraction pattern made by x-rays incident


on a sample. On the left is a diffraction pattern made by an
electron beam incident on the same sample.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Like photons, the wavelength of a matter wave is given by

h
 .
p

This is known as the de Broglie wavelength.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.4): What are the de Broglie


wavelengths of electrons with the following values of kinetic
energy? (a) 1.0 eV and (b) 1.0 keV.

(a) The momentum of the electron is

p  2mK
  
 2 9.11 10 31 kg 1.0 eV  1.60  10 31 J/eV 
 5.4 10  25 kg m/s

and
h 6.626 10 34 Js 9
   25
 1 . 23  10 m  1.23 nm.
p 5.4 10 kg m/s
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) The momentum of the electron is

p  2mK
  
 2 9.11 10 31 kg 1.0 103 eV 1.60  10 31 J/eV 
 1.7 10  23 kg m/s

and
h 6.626  10 34 Js 11
   23
 3 . 88  10 m  38.8 pm.
p 1.7 10 kg m/s

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.7): What is the de Broglie


wavelength of an electron moving with a speed of 0.6c?

1
This is a relativistic electron with   1.25.
2
v
1 2
c

Its wavelength is

h h
 
p mv
6.626 10 34 Js 12
  3 .23  10 m.

1.25 9.1110 kg 1.8 10 m/s
31 8
 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A beam of electrons may be used in a double slit experiment


instead of a light beam. If this is done, a typical interference
pattern will be produced on the screen indicating electrons
act like waves.

If a detector is placed to try to determine which of the two


slits the electron goes through, the interference pattern
disappears indicating the electron now behaves like a
particle.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.3 Electron Microscope

The resolution of a light microscope is limited by diffraction


effects. The smallest structure that can be resolved is
about half the wavelength of light used by the microscope.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An electron beam can be produced with much smaller


wavelengths than visible light, allowing for resolution of
much smaller structures.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.15): An image of a biological


sample is to have a resolution of 5 nm. (a) What is the
kinetic energy of a beam of electrons with a de Broglie
wavelength of 5.0 nm?
p2 h2
K 
2m 2m2
 21
 9.64  10 J  0.060 eV
(b) Through what potential difference should the electrons
be accelerated to have this wavelength?

K  U
 qV  eV
K 0.060 eV
V    0.060 Volts
e e Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) Why not just use a light microscope with a wavelength


of 5 nm to image the sample?

An EM wave with = 5 nm would be an x-ray.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.4 The Uncertainty Principle

The uncertainty principle sets limits on how precise


measurements of a particle’s momentum and position can
be.
1
xp x  
2
h
where 
2
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The more precise a measurement of position, the more


uncertain the measurement of momentum will be and the
more precise a measurement of momentum, the more
uncertain the measurement of the position will be.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The energy-time uncertainty principle is

1
Et  .
2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.18): An electron passes through


a slit of width 1.010-8 m. What is the uncertainty in the
electron’s momentum component in the direction
perpendicular to the slit but in the plane containing the slit?

The uncertainty in the electron’s position is half the slit


width x=0.5a (the electron must pass through the slit).

 
p x    1.1 10  26 kg m/s
2 x a

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.19): At a baseball game, a radar


gun measures the speed of a 144 gram baseball to be
137.320.10 km/hr. (a) What is the minimum uncertainty of
the position of the baseball?

px = mvx and vx = 0.10 km/hr = 0.028 m/s.

1
xp x  mxv x  
2

x   1.3  10 32 m
2mv x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) If the speed of a proton is measured to the same


precision, what is the minimum uncertainty in its position?


xx 
  1.110 6 m
2m p v x

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.5 Wave Functions for a


Confined Particle

A particle confined to a region of space will have quantized


energy levels.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Consider a particle in a box of width L that has impenetrable


walls, that is, the particle can never leave the box.

Since the particle cannot be found outside of the box, its


wave function must be zero at the walls. This is analogous
to a standing wave on a string.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

This particle can have

2L
n  With n=1,2,3,…
n
h nh
pn   .
n 2L

p2
The kinetic energy of the particle is KE  .
2m

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

And its total energy is E  K  U


p2 n2h2
 0 2
.
2m 8mL

The energy of the particle is quantized. The ground state


(n=1) energy is
h2
E1 
8mL2

2
so that En  n E1.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.29): A marble of mass 10 g is


confined to a box 10 cm long and moves with a speed of 2
cm/s. (a) What is the marble’s quantum number n?

1 2 6
The total energy of the marble is En  mv  0  2.0  10 J.
2

h2
In general En  n 2 E1 E1  2
.
8mL

En 8mEn L2 28
Solving for n: n  2
 6  10 .
E1 h

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Why do we not observe the quantization of the marble’s


energy?

The difference in energy between the energy levels n and


n+1 is
2
En 1  En  n  1 E1  n 2 E1
 2nE1  E1
 2n  1E1  6.6 10 35 J.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The change in kinetic energy of the marble would be


1 2 1 2
K  mv f  mvi
2 2
1

 m v 2f  vi2
2

1
 mv f  vi v f  vi   mvi v f  vi . Assume vfvi.
2

To make a transition to the level n+1, the ball’s speed must


change by
K
v f  vi    3.3 1031 m/s.
mvi Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If a container has walls of finite height, a particle in the box


will have quantized energy levels, but the number of bound
states (E < 0 ) will be finite.

In this situation the wave functions of the particle in the box


extend past the walls of the container. This means there is a
nonzero probability that the particle can “tunnel” its way
through the walls and escape the box.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The probability of finding a particle is proportional to the


square of its wave function.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.6 The Hydrogen Atom: Wave


Functions and Quantum Numbers

In the quantum picture of the atom the electron does not


orbit the nucleus. Quantum mechanics can be used to
determine the allowed energy levels and wave functions for
the electrons.

The wave function allows the determination of the


probability of finding the electron in a given region of space.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The allowed energy levels in the hydrogen atom are

mk 2 e 4 2
En   2
 n E1 where E1=-13.6 eV.
2
n is the principle quantum number.

Even though the electron does not orbit the nucleus, it


has angular momentum.

L  l l  1   Where l=0, 1, 2,…n-1

l is known as the orbital angular


momentum quantum number.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For a given n and l, the angular momentum about the z-axis


(an arbitrary choice) is also quantized.

Lz  ml  ml=-l, -l+1,…, -1, 0, +1,…l-1, l

ml is the orbital magnetic quantum number.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The spectrum of hydrogen can only be fully explained if the


electron has an intrinsic spin. It is useful to compare this to
the Earth spinning on its axis. This cannot be truly what is
happening since the surface of the electron would be
traveling faster than the speed of light.

S z  ms  ms=½ for an electron

ms is the spin magnetic quantum number.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Electron cloud representations of the electron probability


density for an H atom:

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.7 The Pauli Exclusion Principle

The Pauli Exclusion Principle says no two electrons in an


atom can have the same set of quantum numbers. An
electron’s state is fully described by four quantum numbers
n, l ,ml, and ms.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

In an atom:

A shell is the set of electron states with the same


quantum number n.

A subshell is a unique combination of n and l. A


subshell is labeled by its value of n and quantum
number l by using spectroscopic notation.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Each subshell consists of one or more orbitals specified


by the quantum numbers n, l, and ml. There are 2l+1
orbitals in each subshell.

The number of electron states in a subshell is 2(2l+1),


and the number of states in a shell is 2n2.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The subshells are filled by electrons in order of increasing


energy.

1s,2 s,2 p,3s,3 p,4 s,3d ,4 p,5s,4d ,5 p,6 s,4 f ,5d ,6 p,7 s

Beware! There are exceptions to this rule.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The electron configuration for helium


is:

specifies the number of


2
1s electrons in this orbital

Specifies n
Specifies l

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.36): How many electron states of


the H atom have the quantum numbers n=3 and l=1? Identify
each state by listing its quantum numbers.

Here ml=-1,0,1 and since 2 electrons can be placed in


each orbital, there can be 6 electron states.

n l ml ms
3 1 -1 -½
3 1 -1 +½
3 1 0 -½
3 1 0 +½
3 1 +1 -½
3 1 +1 +½
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.38): (a) Find the magnitude of the


angular momentum L for an electron with n=2 and l=1?

L  l l  1  11  1  2

(b) What are the allowed values of Lz?

The allowed values of ml are +1,0,-1 so that Lz can be

 1
0
 1.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

Lz
(c) What are the angles between
the positive z-axis and L so that
the quantized components, Lz, 1
have allowed values?

1
2
When l=1, ml=-1,0,+1 0
3

ml  Lz
cos   
L l l  1
 1
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

 1 1
cos 1    1  45
2 2
0
cos  2   0   2  90
2
 1 1
cos  3     3  45  135
2 2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


44
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.8 Electron Energy Levels in a


Solid

An atom in isolation will only be able to emit photons of


energy E that correspond to the difference in energies
between the energy levels in the atom (a line spectrum).

When atoms are not in isolation, the wave functions overlap


which causes the energy levels to split. As a result, a solid
(a large collection of atoms close together) will emit a
continuous spectrum.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


45
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


46
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

In a solid, because of the


large number of atoms (N)
present, each energy level
becomes a band of N
closely spaced energy
levels. Solids also show
band gaps where there
are no allowed electron
energy levels.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


47
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A material is a conductor if
the highest energy electron
state filled at T= 0 is in the
middle of the band (the
band is only partially filled).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


48
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

If electrons fill their allowed states right to the top of the


band, the material is either a semiconductor or an
insulator.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


49
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.9 Lasers

Laser is an acronym for Light Amplification by Stimulated


Emission of Radiation.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


50
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An electron can go to a higher energy level by the


absorption of a photon.

When an electron is in an excited state, it can go into a


lower energy level by the spontaneous emission a photon.

An electron in an excited state can also go into a lower


energy level by the stimulated emission of a photon.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


51
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


52
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A photon of energy E can stimulate the emission of a


photon (by interacting with the excited electron). The
emitted photon will have the same energy, phase, and
momentum of the stimulating photon.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


53
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Typically the excited states of electrons have lifetimes of


about 10-8 seconds. To make a laser, the material must have
metastable states with lifetimes of about 10-3 seconds. This
allows for a population inversion in which more electrons
are in a higher energy state rather than in a lower energy
state.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


54
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 28.52): In a ruby laser, laser light of


wavelength 694.3 nm is emitted. The ruby crystal is 6.00
cm long, and the index of refraction of the ruby is 1.75.
Think of the light in the ruby crystal as a standing wave
along the length of the crystal. How many wavelengths fit
in the crystal?

The wavelength of light in the crystal is

0
694.3 nm
   396.7 nm
n 1.75

L
number of wavelengths   1.51105.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
55
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§28.10 Tunneling

For a wide barrier, the probability per unit time of a particle


tunneling through the barrier is
2a
Pe
where a is the width of barrier and  is a measure of the
barrier height.

2m
 2
U 0  E 

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
56
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


57
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary
•Matter as a Wave
•The Uncertainty Principle
•What Is a Wave Function?
•The Hydrogen Atom
•The Pauli Exclusion Principle
•Quantum Mechanical Tunneling
•Electron Energy Levels in a Solid
•The Laser
•The Electron Microscope Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
58
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics

•The Nucleus
•Binding Energy
•Radioactivity
•Half-life
•Biological Effects of Radiation
•Induced Nuclear Reactions
•Fission and Fusion

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.1 Nuclear Structure

The atomic nucleus is composed of neutrons and protons.


These particles are called nucleons.

The atom’s atomic number (Z) gives the number of protons


in its nucleus. It is the atomic number that determines an
atom’s identity.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The nucleon number or mass number is A = Z+N, where


N is the number of neutrons.

Masses of atoms are sometimes give in terms of atomic


mass units. 1u = 1.66053910-27 kg.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Atoms of the same element with differing numbers of


neutrons are known as isotopes.

The mass quoted for an atom in the periodic table is a


weighted average over all of the natural isotopes of that
element. The weight factors are determined by using the
relative abundance on Earth of each isotope.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

For an atomic nucleus


m A
V  A.
This implies the density of an atomic nucleus is independent
of A.
4 3
V  r  A
3
1
rA3
1
As an equality r  r0 A 3

where r0=1.210-15 m = 1.2 fm


Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.2): Calculate the mass density of


nuclear matter.

Consider a nucleus with one nucleon (A = 1).


1 15
r  r0 A  1.2 10 3
m

m
The density is  
4 3
r
3
1.66  10  27 kg
  2.3  1017 kg/m 3 .
4
3
 1.2 10 m 
15 3

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.9): Find the radius and


107
volume of the 43 Tc nucleus.

The radius is

  1/3
r  r0 A1/3  1.2 10 15 m 107   5.70  10 15 m.

4 3
The volume is V  r  7.7  10  43 m 3 .
3

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.2 Binding Energy

A nucleus is held together by the strong nuclear force.


This force only acts over distances of a few fermis.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The binding energy (EB) of a nucleus is the energy that


must be supplied to separate it into individual protons and
neutrons.

EB = Total energy of Z protons and N neutrons – total


energy of nucleus.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Total energy of Z protons and N neutrons = (mass of Z


protons and N neutrons)c2.

Total energy of nucleus= (mass of nucleus)c2.

These can be used to define the mass defect m =


(mass of Z protons and N neutrons) - (mass of nucleus)
so that
E B  mc 2 .

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Nucleons also obey the Pauli Exclusion Principle such that


only two protons (neutrons) can occupy each proton
(neutron) energy level.

Like an atom, a nucleus can be put into an excited state if it


absorbs a photon of the correct energy. The nucleus can
then emit a photon to go to a lower energy state.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.14): (a) Find the binding energy


of the 16O nucleus.

m  mass of 8 H atoms  mass of 8 neutrons 


 mass of neutral 16 O atom
 81.0078250  1.0086649 u  15.9949146u
 0.1370046u

2
EB  mc  127.8 MeV
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) What is the average binding energy per nucleon?

EB
Binding energy per nucleon 
number of nucleons

 7.986 MeV/nucleon.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.3 Radioactivity

Some nuclei are unstable and decay. These nuclei are


radioactive. A nucleus can emit an alpha ray, beta ray, or
a gamma ray during its decay.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

During nuclear reactions:


1. Charge is conserved.
2. The total number of nucleons is constant.
3. Energy is conserved.

Define: disintegration energy = binding energy of


radioactive nucleus – total binding energy of products.
This is the rest mass energy that can be converted into
other forms of energy.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Alpha rays have been identified as helium nuclei.

The reaction for alpha decay is

A A 4 4
Z P Z 2 D 
2

Parent Daughter Alpha


nucleus nucleus particle

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.28): Show that the spontaneous


alpha decay of 19O is not possible.

19 15 4
The reaction is
8 O C   .
6 2

The mass of the products (including electrons) is


19.01320250u.
The mass of 19O is 19.0035787u.

The mass of the products is larger than the reactant, so


this reaction cannot occur spontaneously.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Beta rays have been identified as either electrons (-) or


positrons (+).

The reaction for beta-minus decay is

A A 0 0
Z P Z 1 D  e  .
1 0

The reaction for beta-plus decay is

A A 0 0
Z P Z 1 D  e  .
1 0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The neutrino and antineutrino have no charge and are


nearly massless. They do not readily interact with matter.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

During beta-minus decays, a neutron is converted into a


proton.
1 1 0 0
0 n  p  e 
1 1 0

During beta-plus decays, a proton is converted into a


neutron.
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 0 p n  e  

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.29): Calculate the maximum


40
kinetic energy of the beta particle when 19 K decays via
- decay.

40 40 0 0
The reaction is
19 K  Ca  e  .
20 1 0

The maximum kinetic energy of the electron is given by the


disintegration energy.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The difference between the mass of the products and the


reactant is

m  M Ca  20me   me   M K  19me 


 M Ca  M K
 0.00140750 u.
The disintegration energy and the maximum KE of the
electron is
2
EB  m c  1.31 MeV.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

During inverse beta decay (electron capture) a proton in


a nucleus captures an electron. The reaction is

0 1 1 0
1 e  p n   .
1 0 0

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Gamma rays were determined to be high energy photons.

A gamma ray will be emitted when a nucleus is an excited


state when making a transition to a lower energy level. For
example,

208 * 208
81 Tl  Tl   .
81

When a nucleus has experienced alpha or beta decay, it


is not always left in the ground state.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.4 Radioactive Decay Rates


and Half-Lives

The half-life of a sample of unstable nuclei is the time it


takes for one-half of the sample to decay. The decay
process is quantum mechanical and is based on probability.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Each radioactive nucleus has a probability per second that it


will decay, called the decay constant.

probability of decay
decay constant   
unit time

The number of nuclei that decay in a short time interval is

N   Nt.

There are statistical fluctuations in the number of decays


that occur. These fluctuations are of order N .
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
29
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The decay rate or activity is the number of radioactive


decays that occur in a sample per unit time.

number of decays N
R   N
unit time t

The unit of activity is the bequerel. 1 Bq = 1 decay/sec.


Another common unit is the curie. 1 Ci = 3.71010 Bq.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


30
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The number of nuclei remaining in a sample having N0


nuclei at t=0 is

N t   N 0 e  t / .

1
 is the mean lifetime of a nucleus.

Note: the above expression for N(t) is a way to determine


the number of remaining nuclei only. It does not tell us
which nuclei have decayed.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


31
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The activity at time t is Rt   R0 e t /

where R0 is the activity at t=0.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


32
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

It is common to write the expressions for N(t) and R(t) in


terms of half-life (T1/2).
t
T1 / 2
 t
 1
T1/ 2   ln 2 N t   N 0  2 T1 / 2
  N0  
  2

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


33
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.37): Some bones discovered in a


crypt in Guatemala are carbon dated. The 14C activity is
measured to be 0.242 Bq per gram of carbon.
Approximately how old are the bones?

Rt   R0 e  t /

Solve for t:

 Rt  
t   ln 
 R0 
T1/2  R t    5730 years   0.242 bq/gram 
 ln     ln   270 years
ln 2  R0   ln 2   0.25bq/gram 
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
34
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.5 Biological Effects of


Radiation

The absorbed dose of ionizing radiation is the amount of


radiation energy absorbed per unit mass of tissue. Ionizing
radiation is radiation with enough energy to ionize an atom
or molecule.

The SI unit of absorbed dose is the Gray. 1 Gy = 1 J/kg.


Another common unit is the rad (radiation absorbed dose).
1 rad = 0.01 Gy.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
35
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Different radiation causes different amounts of biological


damage. The biologically equivalent dose measures the
amount of damage caused by radiation exposure.

Equivalent dose (in sieverts) = absorbed dose (in grays)* QF.


Equivalent dose (in rem) = absorbed dose (in rads)* QF.

QF is a quality factor that


is a relative measure of
biological damage (200
keV x-rays have QF = 1).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


36
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The sievert is the SI unit of biologically equivalent dose.


1 Sv = 100 rem.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


37
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Alpha, beta, and gamma radiation penetrates to different


depths in biological materials.

•Alpha rays are stopped by a few cm of air or about 0.02


mm of aluminum.
•Beta-minus can penetrate a few cm into biological tissue.
•Gamma ray absorption is based on probability so they
can penetrate to varying depths.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


38
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.45): An alpha particle produced in


radioactive alpha decay has a kinetic energy of typically
about 6 MeV. When an alpha particle passes through matter,
it makes ionizing collisions with molecules, giving up some of
its kinetic energy to supply the binding energy of the electron
that is removed. If a typical ionization energy for a molecule
in the body is around 20 eV, roughly how many molecules
can the alpha particle ionize before coming to rest?

total energy of alpha particle


number of ionizations 
energy lost per ionization
6 MeV
  5  105 ionizations
20 eV
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
39
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.6 Induced Nuclear Reactions

An unstable nucleus decays in a spontaneous nuclear


reaction. An induced nuclear reaction only takes place
because it is caused by a collision between a nucleus and
another particle.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


40
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

14 14
For example, n  N  C  p.
The above reaction is induced by the absorption of a
neutron. This process is called neutron activation.

A spontaneous nuclear reaction will always release energy.


In an induced nuclear reaction, some of the kinetic energy
of the reactants is converted into rest mass of the products.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


41
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An exoergic reaction releases energy.

An endoergic reaction is one that requires energy to make


it proceed.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


42
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.49): A certain nuclide absorbs a


neutron. It then emits an electron, and then breaks up into
two alpha particles. (a) Identify the original nucleus and the
two intermediate nuclei (after absorbing the neutron and
after emitting the electron).

The reactions are


a c e
1
0 n   X 1   X 2   X 3  e
b d f
0
1
e
f
 X 3     . 4
2
4
2

Since the number of nucleons is conserved e = 4 + 4 = 8.


Charge is conserved so f = 2 + 2 = 4. Identify X3 as Be.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
43
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

In the second step of the first reaction c= e+0 = 8 and


d = f - 1. This gives d = 3. Identify X2 as Li.

In the first step of the reaction a + 1 = c so a = 7 and


b + 0 = d = 3. Identify X1 as Li.

The nuclei involved are

7 8 8
X 1  Li; X 2  Li; X 3  Be.
3 3 4

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


44
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) Would any (anti)neutrino(s) be emitted? Explain.

In the second reaction (the beta decay of 8Li) will also


involve the emission of one antineutrino.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


45
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.7 Fission

Fission is when a large nucleus splits into two smaller,


more tightly bound nuclei. This process releases energy.

Fission can either occur spontaneously when the nucleus


is very large, or it can be induced. When fission occurs by
the capture of slow moving neutrons, a chain reaction can
occur.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
46
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§29.8 Fusion

The process of fusion takes two small nuclei to form a


larger nucleus.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


47
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The process of fusion is the energy production mechanism


in cores of stars. Stars on the main sequence (like the Sun)
turn hydrogen into helium in their cores. This occurs by the
proton-proton cycle and by the CNO (carbon) cycle.

Overall, this process take four protons and turn them into a
helium nucleus and energy.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


48
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 29.57): Consider the fusion reaction


between a proton and a deuteron (shown below). (a)
Identify the reaction product X.

1 2
1 H H  X 1

The product must have 3 nucleons and a charge (atomic


number) of 2. The element is He.

3
2 He

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


49
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(b) The binding energy of the deuteron is about 1.1 MeV


per nucleon and the binding energy of “X” is about 2.6
MeV per nucleon. Approximately how much energy (in
MeV) is released in this fusion reaction?

The binding energies are: 0 MeV for 1H; 2.2 MeV for
2H; and 7.8 MeV for 3He.

Energy released = difference in binding energy between


the products and reactants = 7.8 MeV – 2.2 MeV = 5.6
MeV.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
50
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

(c) Why is this reaction unlikely to occur at room


temperature?

At room temperature the reactants will not have


enough kinetic energy to overcome the Coulomb
repulsion between them to get close enough to fuse.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


51
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary
•The Nucleus (atomic & mass numbers)
•Binding Energy
•Radioactive Nuclei
•Alpha, Beta, and Gamma Radiation
•Half-life and Activity
•Absorbed Dose
•Spontaneous vs. Induced Nuclear Reactions
•Fission vs. Fusion
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
52
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Chapter 30: Particle Physics

•Fundamental Particles (quarks and leptons)


•Fundamental Interactions
•Unification
•Particle Accelerators
•21st Century Particle Physics

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


1
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§30.1 Fundamental Particles

Protons and neutrons are not fundamental particles. They


are composed of three quarks each.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


2
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Each quark has an antiquark that has the same mass, but
opposite charge.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


3
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

An isolated quark has not been seen, but combinations of


quarks make up the particle groups known as mesons and
baryons. Both groups fall under the name of hadron.

A meson is a bound quark/antiquark pair.

A baryon is composed of three bound quarks.

Recent data points to the existence of a new type of baryon


called a pentaquark which is a five quark system that
contains four quarks and one antiquark or four antiquarks
and one quark.
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
4
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The proton and neutron are baryons. A proton is made of


two up quarks and one down quark (uud) and a neutron is
two down quarks and one up quark (udd).

A free neutron decays with a half-life of 10.2 minutes, but


a neutron in a nucleus can be stable. The proton appears
to be stable with a half-life of at least 1029 years.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


5
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


6
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The electron belongs to a group of particles called leptons.


No internal structure of an electron has been observed yet.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


7
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The leptons and quarks are grouped into three generations.


Ordinary matter is made up of particles from the first
generation.

The muon and tau leptons are not stable, but the electron
is stable.

The three “flavors” of neutrinos are able to change from


one flavor to another (a neutrino oscillation).

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


8
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§30.2 Fundamental Interactions

Each fundamental force in nature occurs by the exchange


of a mediator or an exchange particle.

The exchange particle can transfer momentum and energy


between particles.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


9
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Electromagnetic interactions are mediated by the photon.


Weak interactions are mediated by the W+, W-, and Z0.
Strong interactions are mediated by gluons.
Gravity is mediated by the graviton.

Photons, gluons, and gravitons have no charge and are


massless.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


10
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The strong interaction holds quarks together to form


hadrons.

Quarks have a property called color charge that determine


their strong interactions. Leptons have no color charge and
so do not “feel” the strong force.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


11
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

There are three types of color charges (red, green, and


blue). They form colorless combinations. One each of red,
green, and blue will form a colorless baryon. For example,
one red and one antired quark can form a meson.

It is the need to have colorless quark combinations which


prevents them from being removed from a colorless group.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


12
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

A gluon mediates a strong interaction. Quarks emit and


absorb gluons, which carry a color charge. Absorbing or
emitting a gluon changes the color of a quark.

The strong interaction keeps both quark systems and


atomic nuclei bound together.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


13
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The weak interaction proceeds by the exchange of the


W+, W-, and Z0. These particles have nonzero masses.

Quarks and leptons have weak charge and so feel the


weak force.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


14
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The weak interaction allows one flavor of quark to change


into any other flavor of quark. In beta-minus decay, a
neutron changes into a proton. This occurs when a down
quark changes into an up quark by emitting a W-, which
then decays into an electron and an electron antineutrino.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


15
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

The quantum mechanical description of the strong, weak,


and electromagnetic forces along with the three generations
of quarks and leptons is called the standard model. The
standard model is not complete.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


16
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§30.3 Unification

Just after the Big Bang, it is believed that all four


fundamental forces were unified together as a single force.
As the universe expanded and cooled, the force of gravity
split off, followed by the strong force, which was followed by
the splitting of the weak and electromagnetic forces.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


17
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Experiments have been done to show that under certain


conditions the electromagnetic and weak forces are
unified into the electroweak force.

So far a quantum theory of gravity has not been developed.


General relativity works on large size scales, but fails on
the size scale of atoms.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


18
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Supersymmetry is an attempt at unifying the strong and


electroweak interactions.

It has been found that including extra dimensions is a


way to unify gravity with the other forces.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


19
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

String theories treat the fundamental particles as vibrating


loops of energy. These “strings” vibrate in 10 or 11
dimensions. The extra dimensions are very compact and
cannot be observed directly.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


20
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§30.4 Particle Accelerators

A particle accelerator is used to give beams of charged


particles high kinetic energy before colliding them with
each other or with a stationary target.

The results of the collision are recorded by various


detectors for later study.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


21
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Two types of particle accelerators are the synchrotron and


the linear accelerator.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


22
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

§30.5 Twenty-First Century Particle


Physics

Some open questions physicists hope to answer:

•Are there only three generations of quarks and leptons?


•Will the Higgs particle be found?
•Are quarks & leptons fundamental particles?
•Is the proton stable?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


23
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

•Why is the force of gravity so weak in comparison to


the other three fundamental forces?
•What is dark matter?
•What is dark energy?
•What happened to all of the antimatter formed in the
early universe?
•Can gravity be unified with the other three fundamental
forces?
•Does our universe only have four dimensions? If so,
why?

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


24
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 30.5): A proton of mass


0.938 GeV/c2 and an antiproton, at rest relative to an
observer, annihilate each other. What are the kinetic
energies of the two pions, each of which has mass
0.14 GeV/c2?
 
The reaction is p  p   .
Total energy is conserved:
Ei  E f
Ep1  Ep2  E 1  E 2
K p1  m p c 2
 K p2  m  
p c 2
 K 1  m c 2
 K  
2  m c 2
  

K 1  K 2  2 m p c 2  m c   1.6 GeV

2

Assuming K1 = K2 then the KE of each pion is 0.8 GeV. Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
25
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 30.9): Two factors that determine the


distance over which a force can act are the mass of the exchange
particle that carries the force and the Heisenberg Uncertainty
Principle. Assume that the uncertainty in the energy of an
exchange particle is given by its rest energy and that the particle
travels at nearly the speed of light. What is the range of the weak
force carried by the Z0 particle that has a mass of 92 GeV/c2?
Compare it to the range of the weak force given in table 30.3.

Et 
2
 x  
E   
 c  2
Same
c 1240 10 9 eV m 18 value as
x    1  10 m
2E 9
4 92  10 eV   table 30.3
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
26
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example (text problem 30.21): A proton in Fermilab’s


Tevatron is accelerated through a potential difference of
2.5 MV during each revolution around the ring of radius
1.0 km. In order to reach an energy of 1 TeV, how many
revolutions must the proton make? How far has it
traveled?
During each revolution, the proton is given kinetic energy
of qV= 2.5 MeV.

total energy
number of revolutions 
energy gain per revolution
1 TeV
  4  105
2.5 MeV
Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.
27
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Example continued:

The distance traveled is

d  circumference of ring * number of revolutions


 2.5  10 6 km.

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


28
Fisica Generale - Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarty Richardson

Summary

•Fundamental Particles (quarks & leptons)


•Fundamental Interactions (strong, weak, EM, gravity)
•Exchange Particles
•Unification
•Particle Accelerators

Copyright © 2008 – The McGraw-Hill Companies s.r.l.


29

You might also like